GRE130_MANUAL_2014

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY

GRE130

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2014 All Rights Reserved.

( Ver. 2.0)

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Safety Precautions Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE130. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Explanation of symbols used Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in minor injury or moderate injury.

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in property damage.

DANGER

WARNING

1

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Exposed terminals

Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated is dangerous.

• Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit immediately after switching off the power supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

CAUTION

• Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.

CAUTION

• Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

• Ratings

Before applying AC voltage or the power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to the equipment ratings.

• Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

• External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

• Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

• Power supply

If a power supply has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event records and disturbance records and the internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.

• Modification

Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.

• Disposal

This product does not contain expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations as an industrial waste. If any points are unclear, please contact our sales representatives.

DANGER

2

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Contents Safety Precautions 1

1. Introduction 6

2. Application Notes 8 2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection 8

2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection 8 2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection 12 2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 16 2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection 19

2.2 Frequency Protection 22 2.2.1 Frequency element 22 2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element 22

2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output 27

3. Technical Description 29 3.1 Hardware Description 29

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 29 3.2 Input and Output Signals 31

3.2.1 AC Input Signals 31 3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 31 3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 35 3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 36

3.3 Automatic Supervision 37 3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 37 3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 37 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 38 3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 40 3.3.5 Failure Alarms 40 3.3.6 Trip Blocking 41 3.3.7 Setting 42

3.4 Recording Function 42 3.4.1 Fault Recording 42 3.4.2 Event Recording 43 3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 43

3.5 Metering Function 45 3.6 Control Function 46

4. User Interface 47 4.1 Outline of User Interface 47

4.1.1 Front Panel 47 4.1.2 Communication Ports 49

4.2 Operation of the User Interface 50

3

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 50 4.2.2 Relay Menu 52 4.2.3 Displaying Records 55 4.2.4 Status Display 61 4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 65 4.2.6 Changing the Settings 67 4.2.7 Control 101 4.2.8 Testing 103

4.3 Personal Computer Interface 106 4.4 Modbus Interface 106 4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 106 4.6 IEC 61850 Communication 106 4.7 Clock Function 107 4.8 Special Mode 108

5. Installation 109 5.1 Receipt of Relays 109 5.2 Relay Mounting 109

5.2.1 Flush Mounting 109 5.2.2 Dimensions 111

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 113 5.4 Handling Precautions 113 5.5 External Connections 114 5.6 Optinal case model S1-GRE130 114

6. Commissioning and Maintenance 115 6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 115 6.2 Cautions 115

6.2.1 Safety Precautions 115 6.2.2 Precautions for Testing 116

6.3 Preparations 116 6.4 Hardware Tests 117

6.4.1 User Interfaces 117 6.4.2 Binary Input Circuits 117 6.4.3 Binary Output Circuits 118 6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 119

6.5 Function Test 120 6.5.1 Measuring Element 120 6.5.2 Protection Scheme 125 6.5.3 Metering and Recording 126

6.6 Conjunctive Tests 126 6.6.1 On Load Test 126 6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test 126

6.7 Maintenance 128 6.7.1 Regular Testing 128

4

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 128 6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit 129 6.7.4 Resumption of Service 129 6.7.5 Storage 129

7. Putting Relay into Service 130

Appendix A 131 Signal List 131

Appendix B 140 Event Record Items 140

Appendix C 146 Binary Output Default Setting List 146

Appendix D 148 Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation 148

Appendix E 159 Case Outline 159

Appendix F 162 Typical External Connection 162

Appendix G 169 Relay Setting Sheet 169

Appendix H 179 Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 179

Appendix I 183 Return Repair Form 183

Appendix J 188 Technical Data 188

Appendix K 194 Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 194

Appendix L 197 Modbus: Interoperability 197

Appendix M 222 IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 222

Appendix P 229 IEC61850: Interoperability 229

Appendix O 268 Ordering 268

The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.2.0)

5

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

1. Introduction GRE130 series relays provide overvoltage and undervoltage protection for distribution substations, generators, motors and transformers.

The GRE130 provides the following protection schemes.

• Overvoltage and undervoltage protection with definite time or inverse time characteristics

• Instantaneous overvoltage and undervoltage protection

The GRE130 series provides the following protection schemes.

• Zero phase sequence overvoltage protection

• Negative phase sequence overvoltage protection

The GRE130 series provides the following functions.

• Two settings groups

• Configurable binary inputs and outputs

• Circuit breaker control and condition monitoring

• Control hierarchy change

• Trip circuit supervision

• Automatic self-supervision

• Menu-based HMI system

• Configurable LED indication

• Metering and recording functions

• Front mounted USB port for PC communications

• Rear mounted RS485 serial port for communication

GRE130 provides continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits are also monitored, by trip circuit supervision and CB condition monitoring features.

A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a front-mounted USB port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485 port. The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access data gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions. Further, data communication with substation control and automation systems is supported according to the MODBUS RTU.

Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE130 series and identifies the functions to be provided by each member.

6

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

Model Number GRE130 -

410A, 411A, 412A [APPL] setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PP 3PN 3PV O/V IDMT O/V DT U/V IDMT U/V DT ZPS IDMT * ZPS DT * NPS IDMT NPS DT FRQ DFRQ Trip circuit supervision Self supervision CB state monitoring Trip counter alarm Multiple settings groups Metering Fault records Event records Disturbance records MODBUS RTU communication

IEC60850-5-103 communication

IEC61850 communication (option) ()* ()* ()* ()* ()* ()* ()*

[APPL]setting; 1PP: single phase-to-phase voltage 1PN: single phase-to-neutral voltage 2PP: two phase-to-phase voltage 2PZ: two phase-to-phase voltage with zero phase voltage input 3PP: three phase-to-phase voltage 3PN: three phase-to-neutral voltage

3PV: three phase-to-neutral voltage with zero phase voltage input Ve: zero phase sequence voltage V0

IDMT: inverse definite minimum time DT: definite time O/V: overvoltage protection U/V: undervoltage protection ZPS: zero phase sequence overvoltage NPS: negative phase sequence overvoltage FRQ: Frequency protection DFRQ: Frequency rate-of-change protection ∗: V0 calculated from three phase voltages ()*: Optional communication for 412A model .

CAUTION: Do not change the APPL setting under service condition of the relay.

7

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2. Application Notes 2.1 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection

2.1.1 Phase Overvoltage Protection

GRE130 provides three independent phase overvoltage elements with programmable dropoff/pickup(DO/PU) ratio. OV1 and OV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. OV3 has definite time characteristic only.

Figure 2.1.1 shows the characteristic of overvoltage elements.

Figure 2.1.1 Characteristic of Overvoltage Elements

The overvoltage protection element OV1 and OV2 have the IDMT characteristic defined by equation (1) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

= × + −

(1)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = overvoltage setting (V),

TMS = time multiplier setting.

k, a, c = constants defining curve.

The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.2. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.2, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [OV1EN] and [OV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [OV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

Table 2.1.1 Specification of Inverse Time Curves

Curve Description k a c

“IDMT” 1 1 0

“C” (User Configurable) 0.000 – 30.000 by 0.001 step

0.00 – 5.00 by 0.01 step

0.000 – 5.000 by 0.001 step

V 0

Pickup

Dropoff

8

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Overvoltage Inverse TimeCurves

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

1 1.5 2 2.5 3

Applied Voltage (x Vs)

Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 1

TMS = 2

TMS = 5

TMS = 10

Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristic

The OV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the OV1 and OV2 elements when the inverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage falls below the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

Both OV1 and OV2 have a programmable drop off/pickup(DO/PU) ratio.

Scheme Logic Figures 2.1.3 to 2.1.5show the scheme logic of the overvoltage protection OV1 to OV3.

The OV1 protection allows the user to select either a definite time or an inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.3. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOV1. The inverse time protection is enabled by setting [OV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal OV1 TRIP is given.

The OV2 protection also provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in

9

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Figure 2.1.4. The scheme logic of OV2 is the same as that of the OV1.

Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.5 show the scheme logic of the definite time overvoltage protection OV3. The OV3 gives alarm signals OV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOV3.

The OV1 to OV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OV1EN] to [OV3EN].

1(∗)

OV1 INST

2(∗)

3(∗)

≥1

≥1

≥1

OV1_TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV1 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

& 1(∗)

OV1 2(∗)

3(∗)

OV1-C_TRIP

OV1-A_TRIP

OV1-B_TRIP &

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV1EN]

+ ≥1

63

64

65

101

102

103

104 51

52

53

1 OV1_BLOCK 15

Figure 2.1.3 OV1 Overvoltage Protection

1(∗)

OV2 INST

2(∗)

3(∗)

≥1

≥1

≥1

OV2_TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TOV2 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

& 1(∗)

OV2 2(∗)

3(∗)

OV2-C_TRIP

OV2-A_TRIP

OV2-B_TRIP &

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[OV2EN]

+ ≥1

66

67

68

108

109

110

111 57

58

59

1 OV2_BLOCK 16


OV3_ ALARM ≥ 1 0.00 - 300.00s

TOV3 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

& 1(∗)

OV3 2(∗)

3(∗)

OV3-C_ ALARM

OV3-A_ALARM

OV3-B_ ALARM &

&

&

[OV3EN] +

69

70

71

115

116

117

118

1 OV3_BLOCK 17


(∗)Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

10

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Phase [APPL] setting

1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP 1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase 2 －－ B - C phase B phase B - C phase 3 －－－ C phase C - A phase

Setting The table shows the setting elements necessary for the overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V OV1 threshold setting

TOV1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV1 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV1EN] = IDMT.

TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV1 definite time setting. Required if [OV1EN] = DT.

TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV1 definite time delayed reset.

OV1DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV1 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV2 threshold setting

TOV2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 OV2 time multiplier setting. Required if [OV2EN] = IDMT.

TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV2 definite time setting. Required if [OV2EN] = DT.

TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OV2 definite time delayed reset.

OV2DPR 10 – 98 % 1 % 95 % OV2 DO/PU ratio setting.

OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V 0.1 V 140.0 V OV3 threshold setting.

TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OV3 definite time setting.

OV3DPR 10 - 98 % 1 % 95 % OV3 DO/PU ratio setting.

[OV1EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV1 Enable

[OV2EN] Off/DT/IDMT/C Off OV2 Enable

[OV3EN] Off / On Off OV3 Enable

11

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.1.2 Phase Undervoltage Protection

GRE130 provides three independent phase undervoltage elements. UV1 and UV2 are programmable for inverse time (IDMT) or definite time (DT) operation. UV3 has definite time characteristic only.

Figure 2.1.7 shows the characteristic of the undervoltage elements.

V 0

Figure 2.1.7 Characteristic of Undervoltage Elements

The undervoltage protection element UV1 has an IDMT characteristic defined by equation (2) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

( )( )

1a

kt G TMS cV

Vs

= × + −

(2)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V (seconds),

V = energising voltage (V),

Vs = undervoltage setting (V),



The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.8. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.8, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [UV1EN] and [UV2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [UV∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

The UV3 element is used for definite time overvoltage protection.

Definite time reset The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the UV1 and UV2 elements when the inverse time delay is used.

If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset period. If the energising voltage is below the undervoltage setting for a transient period without causing tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising voltage rises above the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.

12

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.

Undervoltage Inverse TimeCurves

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1


Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.8 IDMT Characteristic

Scheme Logic Figures 2.1.9 to 2.1.11 show the scheme logic of the undervoltage protection UV1 to UV3.

The UV1 protection provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.8. The definite time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “DT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TUV1. The inverse time protection is enabled by setting [UV1EN] to “IDMT”, and trip signal UV1_TRIP is given.

The UV2 protection also provides a selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure 2.1.10. The scheme logic of UV2 is the same as that of the UV1.

Figure 2.1.11 shows the scheme logic of the definite time undervoltage protection UV3. The UV3 gives alarm signal UV3_ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TUV3.

The UV1 to UV3 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [UV1EN] to [UV3EN].

In addition, there is a user programmable voltage threshold VBLK. If all measured phase voltages drop below this setting, then both UV1 to UV3 are prevented from operating. This function can be blocked by the scheme switch [VBLKEN]. The [VBLKEN] should be set to “OFF” (not used) when the UV elements are used as fault detectors, and set to “ON” (used) when used for load shedding.

Note: The VBLK must be set lower than any other UV setting values.

13

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

≥1

≥1

≥1

UV1_TRIP ≥ 1

1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUV1 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

NON UVBLK

"ON"

[VBLKEN] +

"OFF"

[UVTST]

UV1-C_TRIP

UV1-B_TRIP

UV1-A_TRIP 1(∗)

UV1 2(∗)

3(∗)

"DT"

"IDMT"

[UV1EN]

+ ≥1

VBLK

1(∗)

UV1 INST

2(∗)

3(∗)

157

158

159

72

73

74

&

UVBLK 97

1 UV1_BLOCK

123

124

125

122

18

Figure 2.1.9 UV1 Undervoltage Protection

≥1

≥1

≥1

UV2_TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

TUV2 t 0

t 0

t 0

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

NON UVBLK

UV2-C_TRIP

UV2-B_TRIP

UV2-A_TRIP 1(∗)

UV2 2(∗)

3(∗)

"DT"

"IDMT"

[UV2EN]

+ ≥1

1(∗)

UV2 INST

2(∗)

3(∗)

177

178

179

75

76

77

1 UV2_BLOCK

127

128

129

126

19


+ "ON"

[UV3EN]

0.00 - 300.00s

&

&

&

TUV3 t 0

t 0

t 0

1(∗)

UV3 2(∗)

3(∗)

UV3_ALARM ≥ 1

UV3-C_ALARM

UV3-A_ALARM

UV3-B_ALARM

NON BLK

&

&

&

78

79

80

131

132

133

130

UV3_BLOCK 1 20


(∗)Note : Phases 1, 2 and 3 are replaced with the followings:

14

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Phase [APPL] setting

1PP 1PN 2PP / 2PZ 3PN / 3PV 3PP 1 phase-to-phase phase-to-neutral A - B phase A phase A - B phase 2 －－ B - C phase B phase B - C phase 3 －－－ C phase C - A phase

Setting The table shows the setting elements necessary for the undervoltage protection and their setting ranges.


UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV1M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV1EN] = IDMT.

TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV1EN] = DT.

TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV1 threshold setting

TUV2M 0.05– 100.00 0.01 1.00 UVI time multiplier setting. Required if [UV2EN] = IDMT.

TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV1 definite time setting. Required if [UV2EN] = DT.

TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s UV1 definite time delayed reset.

UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V 0.1 V 40.0 V UV3 threshold setting.

TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UV3 definite time setting.

VBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V 0.1 V 10.0 V Undervoltage block threshold setting.

[UV1EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C

DT UV1 Enable

[VBLKEN] Off / On Off UV block Enable

[UV2EN] Off/ DT/ IDMT/ C

DT UV2 Enable

[UV3EN] Off / On Off UV3 Enable

15

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.1.3 Zero Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

The zero phase sequence overvoltage protection (ZPS) is applied to earth fault detection on unearthed, resistance-earthed system or on ac generators.

The low voltage settings which may be applied make the ZPS element susceptible to any 3rd harmonic component which may be superimposed on the input signal. Therefore, a 3rd harmonic filter is provided to suppress such superimposed components.

For earth fault detection, the following two methods are in general use.

• Measuring the zero sequence voltage produced by a VT residual connection (broken-delta connection) as shown in Figure 2.1.13.

• Measuring the residual voltage across an earthing transformer as shown in Figure 2.114. A B C

GRE130 V0

Figure 2.1.13 Earth Fault Detection on Unearthed System

GRE130

A B

V0

G

Resistor

Figure 2.1.14 Earth Fault Detection on Generator

Two independent elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 are provided. These elements are programmable for definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (3) following the form described in IEC 60255-127:

16

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

+

−

×= c

VV

kTMSGt

S1

)(0

α (3)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V0 (seconds),

V0 = Zero sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Zero sequence overvoltage setting (V),



The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.15. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.15, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [ZPS∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

ZPS OvervoltageInverse Time Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 20


Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.15 IDMT Characteristic for ZPS

17

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Definite time reset A definite time reset characteristic is applied when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic Figures 2.1.16 and 2.1.17 show the scheme logic of the zero-phase sequence overvoltage protection. Two zero-phase sequence overvoltage elements ZPS1 and ZPS2 with independent thresholds output trip signals ZPS1 TRIP and ZPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TZOV1 and TZPS2.

The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [ZPS1EN] and [ZPS2EN].

ZPS1 ZPS1 TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TZPS1 t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[ZPS1EN]

+ ≥1

93

ZPS1 INST

197 134

ZPS1_BLOCK 21

Figure 2.1.16 ZPS1 Overvoltage Protection

ZPS2 ZPS2_ALARM ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TZPS2 t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[ZPS2EN]

+ ≥1

94

ZPS2 INST

198 135

ZPS2_BLOCK 22

Figure 2.1.17 ZPS2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the zero sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

Element Range Step Default Remarks ZPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V ZPS1 threshold setting (V0) for tripping. TZPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if

[ZPS1EN]=IDMT. TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS1 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS1EN]=DT.

TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS1 definite time delayed reset. ZPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V ZPS2 threshold setting (V0) for alarming. TZPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 ZPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if

[ZPS2EN]=IDMT. TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s ZPS2 definite time setting. Required if [ZPS2EN]=DT. TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s ZPS2 definite time delayed reset. [ZPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C DT ZPS1 Enable [ZPS2EN] Off / On Off ZPS2 Enable

18

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.1.4 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage Protection

The negative phase sequence overvoltage protection (NPS) is used to detect voltage unbalance conditions such as reverse-phase rotation, unbalanced voltage supply etc.

The NPS protection is applied to protect three-phase motors from the damage which may be caused by the voltage unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to motors due to a phase loss can lead to increases in the negative sequence voltage.

The NPS protection is also applied to prevent the starting of the motor in the wrong direction, if the phase sequence is reversed.

Two independent elements NPS1 and NPS2 are provided. The elements are programmable for definite time delayed or inverse time delayed (IDMT) operation.

The inverse time characteristic is defined by equation (4) following the form described in IEC 60255-127.

+

−

×= c

VV

kTMSGt

S1

)(2

α (4)

where:

t = operating time for constant voltage V2 (seconds),

V2 = Negative sequence voltage (V),

Vs = Negative sequence overvoltage setting (V),



The IDMT characteristic is illustrated in Figure 2.1.18. In addition to the IDMT curve in Figure 2.1.18, a user configurable curve is available via scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN]. If required, set the scheme switch [NPS∗EN] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c. These curves are defined in Table 2.1.1.

19

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

NPS OvervoltageInverse Time Curves

0.010

0.100

1.000

10.000

100.000

1000.000

0 5 10 15 20


Ope

ratin

g Ti

me

(sec

s)

TMS = 10

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

Figure 2.1.18 IDMT Characteristic for NPS

Definite time reset A definite time reset characteristic is applied to the NPS1 element when the inverse time delay is used. Its operation is identical to that for the phase overvoltage protection.

Scheme Logic Figures 2.1.19 and 2.1.20 show the scheme logic of the negative sequence overvoltage protection. Two negative sequence overvoltage elements NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds output trip signals NPS1 TRIP and NPS2 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.

The tripping can be disabled using scheme switches [NPS1EN] and [NPS2EN].

NPS1 NPS1 TRIP ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TNPS1 t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[NPS1EN]

+ ≥1

95

NPS1 INST

199 136

NPS1_BLOCK 23

Figure 2.1.19 NPS1 Overvoltage Protection

20

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

NPS2 NPS2_ALARM ≥ 1

0.00 - 300.00s

&

TNPS2 t 0

1

&

&

"DT"

"IDMT"

[NPS2EN]

+ ≥1

96

NPS2 INST

200

137

NPS2_BLOCK 24

Figure 2.1.20 NPS2 Overvoltage Protection

Setting The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the negative sequence overvoltage protection and their setting ranges.

The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is approximately 200ms.


NPS1 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 20.0 V NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.

TNPS1M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS1 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=IDMT.

TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS1 definite time setting. Required if [NPS1EN]=DT.

TNPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS1 definite time delayed reset.

NPS2 1.0 - 130.0 V 0.1V 40.0 V NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.

TNPS2M 0.05 – 100.00 0.01 1.00 NPS2 time multiplier setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=IDMT.

TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s NPS2 definite time setting. Required if [NPS2EN]=DT.

TNPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s NPS2 definite time delayed reset.

[NPS1EN] Off /DT/ IDMT/ C Off NPS1 Enable

[NPS2EN] Off / On Off NPS2 Enable

21

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.2 Frequency Protection

For a four-stage frequency protection, GRE130 incorporates dedicated frequency measuring elements and scheme logic for each stage. Each stage is programmable for underfrequency, overfrequency or frequency rate-of-change protection.

Underfrequency protection is provided to maintain the balance between the power generation capability and the loads. It is also used to maintain the frequency within the normal range by load shedding.

Overfrequency protection is typically applied to protect synchronous machines from possible damage due to overfrequency conditions. Frequency rate-of-change protection is applied to ensure that load shedding occurs very quickly when the frequency change is very rapid.

A-phase to B-phase voltage is used to detect frequency.

2.2.1 Frequency element

Underfrequency element UF operates when the power system frequency falls under the setting value.

Overfrequency element OF operates when the power system frequency rises over the setting value.

These elements measure the frequency and check for underfrequency or overfrequency every 5 ms. They operate when the underfrequency or overfrequency condition is detected 16 consecutive times.

The outputs of both the UF and OF elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation during an undervoltage condition.

Figure 2.2.1 shows the characteristics of the UF and OF elements.

Figure 2.2.1 Underfrequency and Overfrequency Elements

2.2.2 Frequency rate-of-change element

The frequency rate-of-change element calculates the gradient of frequency change (df/dt). GRE130 provides two rate-of-change elements, a frequency decay rate element (D) and a frequency rise rate element (R). These elements measure the change in frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt=100ms), as shown Figure 2.2.2 and calculate the Δf/Δt every 5 ms. They operate when the frequency change exceeds the setting value 50 consecutive times.

The output of both the D and R elements is invalidated by undervoltage block element (FRQBLK) operation during undervoltage condition.

22

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Hz

Δ f

Δ t

sec

Figure 2.2.2 Frequency Rate-of-Change Element

Scheme Logic Figure 2.2.3 shows the scheme logic of the frequency protection for stage 1. The first frequency element F11, the second F12, the frequency rise rate-of-change element DFR1 and frequency decay rate-of-change element DFD1 can all output a trip command independently under the condition that the system voltage is higher than the setting of the undervoltage element FVBLK.

F RQ1 TRIP

F12

F11 &

&

0.00 – 1 00.00 S t 0

0.00 – 1 00.00 S t 0 &

FRQ1 BLOCK 1

Scheme Logic Selection : [Logic1]

F1

F2

E

+ [ FT1 ]

≥ 1

≥ 1 U

UU B

OO

O

OFF

DF-D1

DF-R1 & &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

≥ 1

≥ 1

BOTH D R

+ [ DFT1 ] OFF

211 &

212

213

214

235

42

231

232

233

234

Figure 2.2.3 FRQ1 Frequency Protection Logic

To apply the various types of frequency protection, the GRE130 has the following three scheme switches for each stage. For stage 1,

[FT1]: This switch selects the frequency protection to apply as well as provide the measuring elements F11 and F12 with an overfrequency or underfrequency characteristic.

23

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

[FT1] setting

F11 / F12 characteristic Protection selected F11 F12

O OF(*) - Overfrequency protection only with F11 element U UF(**) - Underfrequency protection only with F11 element B OF UF Overfrequency protection with F11 element and

underfrequency protection with F12 element OO OF OF Overfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements UU UF UF Underfrequency protection both with F11 and F12 elements Off OF OF To block frequency protection

(*) OF: Overfrequency characteristic (**)UF: Underfrequency characteristic

[DFT1]: This switch selects which frequency rate-of-change protection to apply. The following protections can be selected by the [DFT1] settings.

[DFT1] setting Protection selected R Frequency rise rate-of-change protection only D Frequency decay rate-of-change protection only

BOTH Both of frequency rise rate-of-change and decay rate-of-change protections

Off To block frequency rate-of-change protection

[LOGIC1]: This switch is provided in the scheme logic selection circuit in Table 2.2.1 and determines the trip command combination of frequency element output and frequency rate-of-change element output. The following table shows the [Logic1] setting and corresponding combinations.

Table 2.2.1 Frequency protection logic

[Logic1] Setting

Scheme Logic Trip Command Logic ( +:OR, x : AND )

L1

E = F1 + F2 + DFR + DFD

L2

E = F1 x (DFR + DFD) + F2

L3

E = F1 + F2 x (DFR + DFD)

L4

E = (F1 + F2) x (DFR + DFD)

E

≥1

≥1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

E

≥1

≥1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

E ≥1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

&

≥1

≥1

DFD

E F1

F2 DFR

24

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

L5

E = F1 x DFR + F2 x DFD

The individual scheme logic for stages 2 to 4 are similar to that of stage 1 except that the device names of the measuring elements, timers, scheme switches and binary input signals change and the logic described above is applied to stages 2 to 4.

F RQ2 TRIP

F22

F21 &

&

0.00 – 1 00.00 S t 0

0.00 – 1 00.00 S t 0 &

FRQ2 BLOCK 1


F1

F2

E

+ [ FT2 ]

≥ 1

≥ 1 U

UU B

OO

O

OFF

DF-D2

DF-R2 & &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

≥ 1

≥ 1

BOTH D R

+ [ DFT2 ] OFF

215 &

216

217

218

240

43

236

237

238

239


F RQ3 TRIP

F32

F31 &

&

0.00 – 1 00.00 S t 0

0.00 – 1 00.00 S t 0 &

FRQ3 BLOCK 1


F1

F2

E

+ [ FT3 ]

≥ 1

≥ 1 U

UU B

OO

O

OFF

DF-D3

DF-R3 & &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

≥ 1

≥ 1

BOTH D R

+ [ DFT3 ] OFF

219 &

220

221

222

245

44

241

242

243

244


E ≥1

DFD

F1

F2

DFR

&

&

25

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

F RQ4 TRIP

F42

F41 &

&

0.00 – 1 00.00 S t 0

0.00 – 1 00.00 S t 0 &

FRQ4 BLOCK 1


F1

F2

E

+ [ FT4 ]

≥ 1

≥ 1 U

UU B

OO

O

OFF

DF-D4

DF-R4 & &

&

FVBLK

&

DFR

DFD

≥ 1

≥ 1

BOTH D R

+ [ DFT4 ] OFF

223 &

224

225

226

250

45

246

247

248

249


Setting The setting elements necessary for the frequency protection and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks F1 (*) 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 51.00 Hz First frequency element setting ( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 61.00 Hz ) F2 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 49.00 Hz Second frequency element setting ( 54.00 – 66.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 59.00 Hz ) DF (**) 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s Frequency rate-of-change (**) FVBLK(***) 40 –100 V 1 V 40 V Undervoltage block TF1 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of first frequency element TF2 0.00 – 100.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Timer setting of second frequency element FT Off / O / U / B / OO / UU B Frequency protection selection DFT Off / R / D / Both Both Frequency rate-of-change protection selection Logic L1 / L2 / L3 / L4 / L5 L1 Scheme logic selection

(*): Number 1 to 4 enter into for stages 1 to 4 respectively. (**): DF is a common setting element name for DFR and DFD. (***): FVBLK is common to stage 1 to 4.

26

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2.3 Trip and Alarm Signal Output

GRE130 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip and alarm for each protection. Figure 2.4.1 shows the trip and alarm signals grouped for each protection.

GRE130 provides 4 or 8 auxiliary relays for binary outputs as described in Section 3.2.3.

After the trip signal has disappeared, following the clearance of the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or via a binary input. This resetting resets all of the output relays collectively.

For the tripping output relay, a check must be made to ensure that the tripping circuit is open by monitoring the status of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker tripping coil current.

OV1 TRIP OV2 TRIP UV1 TRIP UV2 TRIP ZPS1 TRIP NPS1 TRIP FRQ1 TRIP FRQ2 TRIP FRQ3 TRIP FRQ4 TRIP

GEN_TRIP ≥1

141

OV1-A TRIP OV2-A TRIP UV1-A TRIP UV2-A TRIP OV1-B TRIP OV2-B TRIP UV1-B TRIP UV2-B TRIP OV1-C TRIP OV2-C TRIP UV1-C TRIP UV2-C TRIP ZPS1_TRIP

GEN_TRIP-A 372

GEN. TRIP-N 375

≥1

GEN_TRIP-B 373 ≥1

374 ≥1 GEN_TRIP-C

Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs

27

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

OV3 ALARM UV3 ALARM ZPS2 ALARM NPS2 ALARM OV3-A ALARM UV3-A ALARM OV3-B ALARM UV3-B ALARM OV3-C ALARM UV3-C ALARM ZPS2 ALARM

GEN_ALARM ≥1 380

≥1 GEN_ALARM-A 381

≥1 GEN_ALARM-B 382

≥1 GEN_ALARM-C 383

GEN_ALARM-N 384

Figure 2.4.1 Tripping and Alarm Outputs (cont’d)

Pick-up signals GRE130 provides various pick-up signal outputs to select the signal No. for pick-up. The pick-up signal of IDMT elements are output from ***-INST shown as each scheme logic. When the DT elements operate, the ***-INST element is NOT output.

28

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3. Technical Description 3.1 Hardware Description

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules

The case outline of GRE130 is shown in Appendix E.

As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the human machine interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB type-B connector on the front panel.

The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128x64dots) with a back-light and displays recording, status and setting data.

There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

ALARM Yellow Lit when relay alarm is detected.

Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.

CB CLOSED Red/Green/

Yellow

Lit when CB is closed.

CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.

LOCAL Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled

REMOTE Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled

(LED1) Red/Green/Yellow

User-configurable


User-configurable


User-configurable


User-configurable


User-configurable


User-configurable

LED1 to LED6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latched operation. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can be changed to one of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow) , the individual status of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.

The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user,

29

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for ‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by the output of an alarm element such as OV4 ALARM, UV4 ALARM, etc..

The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .

The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates the CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit, the CB can be controlled using the and ｜ keys on the front panel. When the REMOTE LED is lit, the CB can be controlled using a binary input signal or via relay communications. When neither of these LEDs are lit , the CB control function is disabled.

The key starts the Digest screen (Metering, Virtual LED) view on the LCD. The key will scroll the screen through “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when the LCD is in the Digest screen mode.

The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on the LCD.

The END key clears the LCD indication and turns the LCD back-light off when the LCD is in the “MAIN MENU”.

The operation keys are used to display the records, status and setting data on the LCD, to input settings or to change settings.

The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.

Figure 3.1.1 Front Panel (model 410, 411)

To a local PC

Liquid crystal display

Light emitting diodes (LED)

Operation keys

USB type B connector

Control keys

Light emitting diodes (LED)

Motor status

30

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 AC Input Signals

Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE130 model and their respective input terminal numbers. Their terminal numbers depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting.

Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals

: Scheme switch [APPL] setting

Term. No. TB1 at

410/411

TB2 at 412

Model

410, 411, 412

1PP 1PN 2PP 2PZ 3PN 3PV 3PP

1-2 Phase-to-

phase voltage

Phase-to- neutral voltage

A-B phase voltage

A-B phase voltage

A phase voltage

A phase voltage

A-B phase voltage

3-4 --- --- B-C phase voltage

B-C phase voltage

B phase voltage

B phase voltage

B-C phase voltage

5-6 --- --- --- --- C phase voltage

C phase voltage

C-A phase voltage

7-8 Ve Ve --- Ve --- Ve Ve

3.2.2 Binary Input Signals

The GRE130 provides 2 (Model 410) or 6 (Model 411 / 412) programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is programmable, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion, detection threshold voltage change and function selection.

Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change

The binary input circuit of the GRE130 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-up and drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.

The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting range varies depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc rated model is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 and BI2, and to 110V or 220V for BI3-BI6. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for BI3-BI6.

The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at 77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In the case of 24V and 48V supplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configured for operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to “Enable”. For the case where TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3), then the binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc supply

31

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

voltage.

The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change settings are as follow:

Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SNS – BI6SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm

BITHR1 * BI1-2 nominal voltage 48 / 110 / 220

(12 / 24 / 48 )

(24 / 48 / 110 )

110

(24)

(48)

BITHR2 * BI3-6 nominal voltage 110 / 220

(24 / 48)

(48 / 110)

110

(24)

(110)

TCSPEN TCS enable Off / On / Opt-On Off

BI1PUD – BI6PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00

BI1DOD – BI6DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00 *At the PC interface software RSM100 (Relay Setting and Monitoring system), BI threshold voltage

settings are indicated by V1, V2 and V3. The V1, V2 and V3 are distinguished with 11th digit of ordering code for supply voltage, as shown below,:

Supply voltage (11th digt of ordering cord) V1 V2 V3 110 - 220V (-1x-xx) BITH1 48V 110V 220

BITH2 110V 220V - 48 - 110V (-2x-xx) BITH1 24V 48V 110V

BITH2 48V 110V - 12 - 48V (-Ax-xx) BITH1 12V 24V 48V

BITH2 24V 48V -

Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16 characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI2 or BI6 by setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.

The binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc supply voltage.

The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change settings are as follow:

32

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

(−) (+)

GRE130

[BI2SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"

BI1DOD BI1PUD

BI2DOD BI2PUD

BI6DOD

0 t

BI6PUD

t 0

0 t t 0

0 t t 0

0V

1

[BI6SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm"

BI1

BI2

BI6

[BI1SNS]

"Inv"

"Norm" 1

BI1 command

1

BI2 command

1

BI6 command

[BITHR1]

"110V"

"220V"

"48V"

BI1

BI2

+

+

+

[BITHR2]

"110V"

"220V" +

+

BI3

BI6

Figure 3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion

Function selection

The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table 3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For the setting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.

The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic and the LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.

BI1 COMMAND

"ON"

[OV1BLK] OV1 BLOCK

"ON"

[Alarm4] Alarm 4

"ON"

[OV2BLK] OV2 BLOCK

"ON"

[OV3BLK] OV3 BLOCK

Figure 3.2.2 Function Scheme Logic

The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND as shown in Figure 3.2.2.

33

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals

Functions Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Condition

Overvoltage protection1 block OV1 BLOCK / OV 1BLK Closed to block



Undervoltage protection1 block UV1 BLOCK / UV 1BLK Closed to block

Undervoltage protection2 block UV 2 BLOCK / UV 2BLK Closed to block

Undervoltage protection3 block UV 3 BLOCK / UV 3BLK Closed to block

Zero phase sequence OV1 block ZPS1 BLOCK / ZP1BLK Closed to block

Zero phase sequence OV2 block ZPS2 BLOCK / ZP2BLK Closed to block

Negative phase sequenceOV1 block NPS1 BLOCK / NP1BLK Closed to block

Negative phase sequenceOV2 block NPS2 BLOCK / NP2BLK Closed to block

Frequency protection1 block FRQ1 BLOCK / FRQ1BLK Closed to block




Trip circuit supervision TC FAIL / TCFALM Trip supply

State transition for cold load protection, trip supervision and CB monitoring

CB CONT OPN / CBOPN CB normally open contact closed.

CB monitoring CB CONT CLS / CBCLS CB normally closed contactclosed.

Indication remote reset REMOTE RESET / RMTRST Closed to reset TRIP LED indication and latch of binary output relays

Synchronize clock SYNC CLOCK / SYNCLK Synchronize clock

Disturbance record store STORE RECORD / STORCD Closed to store the record

Alarm 1 Alarm 1 / Alarm1 Closed to display Alarm 1 text.




Remote Open Remote OPEN / RMTOPN CB normally open contact.

Remote Close Remote CLOSE / RMTCLS CB normally close contact.

Control Lock Control Lock / CNTLCK Closed to block (*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.

The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between four settings groups.

Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SGS – BI6SGS Setting group selection OFF / 1 / 2 OFF

Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message using up to 22 characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI6 by setting. Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.

34

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.2.3 Binary Output Signals The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix E. All outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.

GRE130 provides 5 auxiliary relays which is composed of one auxiliary relay FAIL for the relay fail output and four programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO4.

The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed. The setting is respective for each output relay.

The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix A can be assigned to output relays BO1 to BO4 individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN / CLOSE for CB control. The CB close control switch ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control switch is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.

Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix G shows the factory default settings.

Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off “Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set by TBO. When “Dw” is selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues, the BO output is continuous for the time duration of the input signal.

When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.

The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the power supply circuit is detected.

Auxiliary relay

0.00 – 10.00s "Dl"

"Lat" S

R F/F

&

Signal List

4 GATES

or

4 GATES ≥1

&

Appendix A ≥1

0 t

+ &

≥

Reset button +

"Dw" [RESET]

&

TBO

RMTRST BI1_COMMAND

Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output

35

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Settings The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:

Element Range Step Default Remarks [RESET] Ins Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix A Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,

delayed, dwell or latched. TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix A

3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function GRE130 is provided with a PLC function which enables user-configurable sequence logic based upon binary signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc. can be produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay elements or binary circuits.

Configurable binary inputs and the initiation of fault and disturbance records can be programmed using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or for using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.

PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For details of the PLC tool, refer to the PLC tool instruction manual. (see 6F2S0810 Instruction manual – PLC TOOL)

Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen for PLC Tool

36

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision Although the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it continuously monitors the power system in order to detect a fault which may occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal operation, plays an important role. The GRE130 implements an automatic supervision function, based on the following concepts:

• The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.

• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.

• When a failure occurs, it is recorded as an Alarm record, the user should be easily able to identify the location of the failure.

• Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.

3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.

AC input imbalance monitoring The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health of the AC input circuit is verified.

• Zero sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]= “3PN” setting

|Va + Vb + Vc| / 3 ≤ 6.35 (V)

• Negative sequence voltage monitoring for [APPL]≠ “1PN” or “1PP” setting

|Va + a2Vb + aVc| / 3 ≤ 6.35 (V) where, a = Phase shift operator of 120°, a2 = Phase shift operator of 240°

The zero sequence monitoring and negative sequence monitoring allow high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred in the AC input circuits.

The negative sequence voltage monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures in the voltage input circuit, and it is effective for detection particularly when cables have been connected with the incorrect phase sequence.

A/D accuracy checking An analog reference voltage is applied to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter, and a check is made to ensure that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.

Memory monitoring Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are done to verify that memory circuits are healthy:

• Random access memory monitoring: Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.

• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.

• Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in duplicate.

37

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Watchdog Timer A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the relay software is provided, to check that the relay software is running normally.

Power supply Monitoring The secondary voltage level is monitored, and a check is made to ensure that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.

Issuing of Alarms The alarms are issued when the failure continues for a predetermined time. The times for each monitoring item are as follows;

• A/D accuracy checking, memory monitoring, Watch Dog Timer, DC supply monitoring: less than 1s

• AC input imbalance monitoring, sampling synchronization monitoring : 15s

3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by either one or two binary inputs, as described below.

Trip Circuit Supervision using 1 binary input

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using a binary input. Figure 3.3.1 shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact , a small current flows through the binary input, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open and closed conditions. Then the logic signal output of the binary input circuit TC FAIL is "1" under healthy conditions.

If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit, then the binary input resets and TC FAIL becomes "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is output when the TC FAIL output is "0". If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED is lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD message.

Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and one BI is selected for "TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CB is closed.

GRE130 Circuit Breaker

Binary Input

CB Aux. Contacts

CB Trip Coil Trip Output +ve Trip Supply

-ve Trip Supply

Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision by 1 binary input

38

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

TC FAIL 1

[TCSPEN]

&

&

+

"ON"

"OPT-ON"

≥1 CB status “closed”

(BI command) TCSV

0.4s

t 0

TC FAIL (BI command)

≥1

0.4s

0 t

Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic

Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 binary inputs

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored using two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.3 shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is intact a small current flows in the photo-couplers, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open and breaker closed conditions.

If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a Trip Circuit Fail alarm.

Monitoring is enabled by setting scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the two BIs selected for " TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, monitoring is enabled only while the CB is closed. TCS using 2BIs should be applied using BI1 and BI2 for the BI inputs. For TCS using 2BIs the BI nominal operating voltage ([BITHR1]) should be set to a value of approximately half that of the trip supply voltage. If the trip supply voltage is 110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] can be set at "48" (or "12").

GRE130 Circuit Breaker

Binary Input (BI1)

CB Aux. Contacts

CB Trip Coil Trip Output +ve Trip Supply

-ve Trip Supply

Resistor

Binary Input (BI2)

Figure 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs

The resistors connected in series with the binary inputs are to prevent unnecessary tripping of the circuit breaker if any one component suffers a short-circuit condition. The value of resistance should be chosen to limit the current flowing through the circuit breaker trip coil to 60mA in the event of a short circuit of BI1 with the circuit breaker closed. A typical value for a 110V dc rated circuit is 3.3kΩ.

39

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of the circuit breaker (CB). If two binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’, then the CB state monitoring function becomes active. Under normal circumstances these inputs are in opposite states. Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state for a period of five seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in an LCD message and event record message respectively.

The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].

Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and BIn respectively, and the functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON” respectively. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)

1

[CBSMEN]

&

+ "ON"

=1 CBSV

5.0s

t 0

CB CONT_CLS

CB CONT_OPN 1271

Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic

Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring Periodic maintenance of a CB is required in order to check the trip circuit, the operating mechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of fault current interruptions.

The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for maintenance of a CB:

• The number of trip operations are counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operating mechanism. The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and informs the user of the time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.

The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].

• Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks the CB operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is advised if the CB operation is slow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase exceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [OPTAEN].

The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3.5 Failure Alarms When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and alarms.

40

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing key. The event record messages are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.

The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.

The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.

When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and event recording of the failure may not function normally.

Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms

Supervision Item LCD Message

LED "IN SERVICE"

LED "ALARM"

LED "Relay fail"

Alarm record Message

AC input imbalance monitoring

Err:V0, Err:V2 (1) On/Off (2) On (4) V0 err, V2 err,

Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2) A/D accuracy check

(1) Off On (4) Relay fail Memory monitoring Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ---- Power supply monitoring Err:DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A CB condition monitoring

Trip count alarm ALM: TP

COUNT On On Off TP COUNT ALM,

Relay fail-A Operating time alarm ALM: OP time On On Off OP time ALM, Relay fail-A

(1): Various messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2. (2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &

BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.5). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM".

(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop. (4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.

The failure alarm and the relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is shown in Table 6.7.1 in Section 6.7.2.

3.3.6 Trip Blocking

When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked for as long as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.

• A/D accuracy check

• Memory monitoring

• Watchdog Timer

When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output(ALM&BLK), or if only an alarm is output (ALM).

41

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.3.7 Setting

The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the table below.

Element Range Step Default Remarks [SVCNT] ALM&BLK/ALM Off Automatic supervision and AC

input imbalance supervision [TCSPEN] Off/On Off Trip circuit supervision [CBSMEN] Off/On Off CB condition supervision [TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm

TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting

The scheme switch [SVCNT] is set in the "Application" sub-menu. Other scheme switches are set in the "Scheme sw" sub-menu.

3.4 Recording Function

The GRE130 is provided with the following recording functions:

Fault recording

Event recording

Disturbance recording

These records are displayed on the LCD screen of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.

3.4.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is initiated by a tripping command from the GRE130 and the following items are recorded for one fault:

Date and time

Trip mode

Operating phase

Power system quantities

Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.

Date and time occurrence This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock.

Trip mode This shows the protection scheme such as OV1, UV1 etc. that output the tripping command.

Faulted phase This is the phase to which a tripping command is output.

42

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Power system quantities The following power system quantities are recorded both pre-fault and post-fault.

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltages (Va, Vb, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltages (Vab, Vbc, Vca)

- Magnitude and phase angle of zero sequence voltage which is measured directly in the form of the system residual voltage (Ve)

- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltages (V1, V2, V0)

- Frequency (f)

3.4.2 Event Recording

The events shown in Appendix B are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. For BI1 to BI6 commands, the user can select the items to be recorded and their status change mode to initiate recording as below.

One of the following four modes is selectable.

Modes Setting

Not to record the event. N

To record the event when the status changes to "operate". O

To record the event when the status changes to "reset". R

To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset". B

For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"

Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs after 200 records have been stored, the oldest event record is overwritten. The LCD display only shows 100 records. All event records (200 records) can be displayed on a PC. For how to download all of the event records onto a PC refer to the RSM100 instruction manual.

3.4.3 Disturbance Recording

Disturbance recording is initiated when the overvoltage or undervoltage starter element operates or a tripping command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is initiated when a start command is initiated. The user can configure four disturbance record triggers.

The records include a maximum of 8 analogue signals as shown in Table 3.4.1, 32 binary signals and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix B can be assigned using the binary signal setting of a disturbance record.

Table 3.4.1 Analog Signals for Disturbance Recording

Model Model 410 , 411, 412

APPL setting 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP

Analog signals

Vph Vph Vab Vab Va Va Vab

Vbc Vbc Vb Vb Vbc

Vc Vc Vca

Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve

43

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The LCD display only shows the dates and times of the disturbance records stored. Details can be displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on a PC, see the RSM software instruction manual.

The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and the post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 3.0s. But the combined duration for the pre-fault and post-fault recording times is 5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in Table 3.4.2. (Recording time = pre-fault recording time + post-fault recording time)

Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.

Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored

Recording time 0.2s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 3.0s 4.0s 5.0s

50Hz 40 29 19 14 9 7 5

60Hz 40 24 16 12 8 6 5

Settings The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.


Time1 0.1-4.9 s 0.1 s 0.3 s Pre--fault recording time

Time2 0.1-4.9 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Post--fault recording time

OV 10.0-200.0 V 0.1 V 120.0 V Overvoltage detection

UV 5.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 60.0 V Undervoltage detection

ZPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Zero sequence overvoltage detection

NPS 1.0-130.0 V 0.1 V 20.0 V Negative sequence overvoltage detection

Starting disturbance recording using a tripping command or the starter element listed above is enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.


[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command

[OV] OFF/ON ON Start by OV operation

[UV] OFF/ON ON Start by UV operation

[ZPS] OFF/ON ON Start by ZPS operation

[NPS] OFF/ON ON Start by NPS operation

44

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.5 Metering Function The GRE130 relay measures current and demand values of phase and phase-to-phase voltages, residual voltage, symmetrical component voltages and frequency. The measurement data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on a local or remote PC.

The following quantities are measured and updated every second.

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase voltage (Va, Vb, Vc)

- Magnitude and phase angle of phase-to-phase voltage (Vab, Vbc, Vca)

- Magnitude and phase angle of symmetrical component voltage (V1, V2, V0)

- Frequency (f) - Maximum and minimum of frequency (f: max, min)

- Frequency rate-of-change (df / dt)

The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the VT ratio as well. For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7. In the case of the maximum and minimum values display above, the measured quantity is averaged over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum and minimum recorded average values are shown on the display screen.

The displayed quantities depend on [APPL] settings and relay model as shown in Table 3.5.1. Input voltage greater than 0.06V at the secondary side are required for measurement.

Phase angles above are expressed taking the positive sequence voltage as a reference phase angle, where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).

Table 3.5.1 Displayed Quantity

Model Model 410

APPL 1PP 1PN 2PP 2PV 3PN 3PZ 3PP

Van

Vbn

Vcn

Vph

Vab

Vbc

Vcb

V1

V2

V0

ｆ

f max

f min

df / dt

45

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3.6 Control Function The relay is provided with the following control functions:

• CB control

• Interlocking

• Change of CB control hierarchy

The CB control function operates the CB by using the open command key or close command key ｜ on the front panel of the relay, a BI command from remote state or by using the communication function.

The interlock function blocks the CB close command using the control lock signal of the BI command.The change of CB control hierarchy changes the CB control state to Local or Remote. The Local mode is controled at the front panel of the relay (see chapter 4.2.7). The Remote mode is controlled by BI command or by a communication function of Modbus (see Appendix M) or IEC 61850 (see Appendix P).

46

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4. User Interface 4.1 Outline of User Interface

The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.

Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring) via a USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using MODBUS communication via an RS485 port.

This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree for the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).

4.1.1 Front Panel

As shown in Figure 3.1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.

(a) Model 410, 411 (b) Model 412

Figure 4.1.1 Front Panel of GRE130 (without cover)

LCD

The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but pressing key will display the digest screen and pressing ENTER key will display the main- menu screen.

These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display at the top of the main-menu. If any display is left for approximately 5 minutes without operation, the back-light will go off.

LED

There are 14 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:

47

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test” menu.

TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.

ALARM Yellow Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.

Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.

CB CLOSED R /G / Y Lit when CB is closed.

CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.

Local Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled

Remote Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled

(LED1) R / G / Y user-configurable






LED1-6 are configurable. For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.

The TRIP LED illuminates when the relay operates and remains lit even after the trip command releases . The TRIP LED can be extinguished by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is maintained.

Operation keys

The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:

, ,

,

: Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical values and text strings.

CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.

END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the display.

ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.

RESET key

Pressing the RESET key causes the Trip LED to turn off and latched output relays to be released.

Control keys

The control keys are used for CB control. When the LCD display cursor is not at the CB control position-(CB close/open , Local / Remote), the Control keys will not function.

: Used for CB open operation. When the CB is in the open position, the key does not function.

48

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

② ｜ : Used for CB close operation. When the CB is in the closed position, the ｜ key does not function

③ L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.

CAUTION

The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.

USB connector

The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.

4.1.2 Communication Ports

The following three interfaces are provided as communication ports:

• USB port

• RS485 port

• Optional Communication Unit port

USB port

This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer (PC) to this connector, setting operation and display functions can be performed.

RS485 port

The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication to connect between relays and to construct a network communication system.

The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.2.

TB2

TB1

RS485 Port

Figure 4.1.2 Location of RS485 Port

49

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Optional Fibre or Ethernet LAN port for model 412A An optional Ethernet LAN port can be connected to substation automation system via an Ethernet communication networks using the IEC 61850 protocol. 100Base-TX (T1: RJ-45 connector) for Ethernet LAN is provided at the rear of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.3.

TB3 TB2 TB1

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

13 14

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11 12

　ｆor Optional Communication Port

Figure 4.1.3 Location of Optional Communication Port

4.2 Operation of the User Interface The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the LCD display and operation keys.

Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore, LCD screens described in this section are samples for a typical model.

4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays Displays during normal operation

When the GRE130 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.

Press the key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are the "Indication", "Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.

Indication I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

50

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Metering V a n * * . * * V

V b n * * . * * V

V c n * * . * * V

V 0 * * . * * V

V 1 * * . * * V

V 2 * * . * * V

f * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

To clear the latched indications (LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault) of the latest fault indication, press RESET key for 3 seconds or more.

For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.

Indication

This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.

I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

Status of element, Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)

Displays in tripping

Latest fault P h a s e A B C : Faulted phases. O V 1 : Tripping element

If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED is lit as well as other configurable LEDs if assigned to trigger by tripping.

Press the to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.

Press the RESET key for more than 3s to reset the LEDs; the Trip LED and configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED6) are assigned to a latched signal if triggered by tripping.

To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:

• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.

51

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.

• Press the key to display the digest screens.

Displays in automatic supervision operation Auto-supervision

E r r : R O M , A / D

If the automatic supervision function detects a failure when the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LED lights.

Press the to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault" screens.

Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM" LED remains lit.

After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off automatically.

If a failure is detected when any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed and the "ALARM" LED lights.

When any of the menu screens is displayed, the RESET key is available. To return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:

• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.

• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

• Press the key to display the digest screens.

Alarm Display Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)

* * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * * * * : A L M 1

The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (For setting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.

Press the to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault" screens.

To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. Clearing is available after displaying up to ALM4.

4.2.2 Relay Menu Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy for the GRE130. The menu has some sub-menus, "Record", "Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see Appendix D.

52

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Record Fault

Event Disturbance Counter

Status Metering Binary I/O Relay element Time sync. Clock adjust. LCD contrast

Set. (view) Version Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED

Control Frequency

Set. (change) Password Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED

Control Frequency

Control Password(Ctrl) Local / Remote CB close/open

Test Password(test) Switch

Binary O/P

Menu

Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu

Record In the "Record" menu, the fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip count can be accessed.

53

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Status The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or RSM), adjusts clock and LCD contrast.

Set. (view) The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate for RSM, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Set. (change) The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings for password, description, relay address and baud rate for Modbus communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.

Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Control The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is in the Local / Remote position, the CB control hierarchy change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is in the CB close/open position, the CB control keys and ｜ are enabled. Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.

Test The "Test" menu is used to set test switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.

When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.

M A I N M E N U

＞ R e c o r d

S t a t u s

S e t . ( v i e w )

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

C o n t r o l

T e s t

To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the key to turn off the LCD, then press the ENTER key.

Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.

An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer. The 8th line under some items is not displayed for all of the screens. " ",or " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that lower or upper lines exist.

To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the window, use the and keys.

54

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T r i p _

> T r i p 1

O f f / O n

B I 1

O f f / O n

O V 1

O f f / O n

U V 1

O f f / O n

Z P S 1

O f F / O n

N P S 1

O f f / O n

F R Q 1

O f f / O n

To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix D press the END or CANCEL key.

The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully because it may cancel entries made so far.

To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then move to the lower screen.

4.2.3 Displaying Records The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip count.

4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:

• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing the ENTER key.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

/ 1 R e c o r d

＞ F a u l t

E v e n t

D i s t u r b a n c e

C o u n t e r

• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.

55

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 2 F a u l t

＞ V i e w r e c o r d

C l e a r

• Select "View record" to display the dates and times of the fault records stored in the relay from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 F a u l t

＞ ♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 1 0

♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 0

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press the ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.

The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.

/ 4 F a u l t ♯ 1

P r e f a u l t v a l u e s

V a n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V b n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V c n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V a b * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V b c * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V c a * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V p h * * . * * k V

V 0 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V 1 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V 2 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

f * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

56

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed. Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to the relay

To clear all the fault records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.

• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.

• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r r e c o r d s

E N D = Y C A N C E L = N

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.

If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not displayed.

4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:



• Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.

/ 2 E v e n t


C l e a r

• Select "View record" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.

/ 3 E v e n t

2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 1 0 0

O V 1 ･ A t r i P O n

2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 0 9 9

O V 1 ･ A t r i p O N

2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 9 8

O V 1 ･ A t r i p O n

2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 2


2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 1 0 0 0 1


57

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The time is displayed by pressing the

key.

/ 3 E v e n t

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1


1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 0 0

O V 1 ･ A t r i p O N

1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 1 1 1


1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 1 1


1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 0 0


Press the

key to return the screen with date.


To clear all the event records, do the following:






• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.

"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.

4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the following sequence.

(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to the RSM100 manual.



• Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.

58

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 2 D i s t u r b a n c e


C l e a r

• Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in new-to-old sequence.


♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0

♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0


To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:






• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.

4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter



• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.

/ 2 C o u n t e r

＞ V i e w c o u n t e r

C l e a r T r i p s

C l e a r T r i p s A (*) C l e a r T r i p s B (*) C l e a r T r i p s C (*)

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions

59

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.

• Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.

/ 3 C o u n t e r

T r i p s * * * * * *

T r i p s A * * * * * * (*) T r i p s B * * * * * * (*) T r i p s C * * * * * * (*)

(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.


To clear each count, do the following:



• Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s ?


• Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s A ?


• Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s B ?


• Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s C ?


• Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.

60

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.4 Status Display

From the sub-menu "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:

Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.

Status of binary inputs and outputs

Status of measuring elements output

Status of time synchronisation source

Status of clock adjustment

Status of LCD contrast

The data is updated every second.

4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

/ 1 S t a t u s

＞ M e t e r i n g

B i n a r y I / O

R e l a y e l e m e n t

T i m e s y n c .

C l o c k a d j u s t .

L C D c o n t r a s t

.

• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 4 M e t e r i n g

V a n * * . * * k V APPL = 3PP

* * * . * °

V b n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V c n * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V a b * * . * * k V APPL = 3PN

* * * . * °

V b c * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V c a * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V p h * * . * * k V APPL = 1PP

61

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

V 0 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V 1 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

V 2 * * . * * k V

* * * . * °

f * * . * * H z

f m a x * * . * * H z

f m i n * * . * * H z

f / t * * . * * H z / s

f / t x * * . * * H z / s

f / t n * * . * * H z / s

Note: Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence voltage (V1) as a reference phase angle. When the V1 is not available, phase angles are not displayed. Frequency above is displayed as "0Hz" when only residual voltage (zero sequence voltage) is input to the relay

4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:


• Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 ]

The display format is shown below.

[ ] Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 FAIL Output (OP2) BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8

Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI6 correspond to each binary input signal. For the binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the photo-coupler output circuit. BI3 to BI6 are not available for model 410.

Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO4 and FAIL are configurable. The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".

FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.

Line 3 shows the binary output status for model 412. BO5-8 (OP2) are available only at model 412

62

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:


• Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.

/ 2 R y e l e m e n t

A N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C N O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

A B O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B C O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C A O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

O V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

A N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C N U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

A B U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

B C U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

C A U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

U V 1 - 3 [ 0 0 0 ]

V Z P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]

V N P S 1 - 2 [ 0 0 ]

F R Q 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]

The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.

[ ]

AN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A phase OV elements

BN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B phase OV element

CN OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C phase OV element

AB OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 A to B phase OV elements

BC OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 B to C phase OV element

CA OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 C to A phase OV element

OV1-3 OV1 OV2 OV3 OV elements

AN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A phase UV element

BN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B phase UV element

CN UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C phase UV element

AB UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 A to B phase UV element

BC UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 B to C phase UV element

CA UV1-3 UV1 UV2 UV3 C to A phase UV element

ZPS1-2 ZPS1 ZPS2 Zero Phase Sequence element NPS1-2 NPS1 NPS2 - - Negative Phase Sequence element FRQ1-4 FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 Frequency element

63

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element is in operation.

4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRE130 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary input signal clock, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP(IEC61850). To display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with, do the following:


• Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.

/ 2 T i m e s y n c .

* B I : A C T .

M o d b u s : I n a c t .

I E C I n a c t

S N T P I n a c t

The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.

Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the status becomes "inactive".

For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.

4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.

/ 2 2 6 / A u g / 2 0 1 0

0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 [ L ]

> M i n u t e

0 _

H o u r

0 _

D a y

2 6 _

M o n t h

8 _

Y e a r

2 0 1 0 _

64

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Lines 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is running locally. When[BI], [M] or [S] is active, the adjustment is invalid.

• Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details on how to enter a numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.

• Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to the previous screen.

If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing the CANCEL key and adjust again.

4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:

• Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.

• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.

/ 2 L C D C o n t r a s t

• Press the

or

key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thinner by pressing the

key and thicker by pressing the

key.

4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set. (change)".

The following items are displayed:

Relay version

Description

Relay address and baud rate for Modbus communication or optional communication. Record setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Control setting

Frequency setting

Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.

65

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.

• Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.

/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )

> V e r s i o n

D e s c r i p t i o n

C o m m s

R e c o r d

S t a t u s

P r o t e c t i o n

B i n a r y I / P

B i n a r y O / P

L E D

C o n t r o l

• Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.

/ 2 V e r s i o n

> R e l a y t y p e

S o f t w a r e .

• Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE130-411A-10-10)

G R E 1 3 0 - 4 1 1 A - 1 0

- 1 0

• Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.

(ex.;GS1EM1-03-A)

S o f t w a r e

G S 1 E M 1 - 0 3 - *

P L C d a t a

P G R E 1 3 0 A * * *

( * * * * * * * * )

66

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.5.2 Settings

The "Description","Comms","Record", "Status","Protection","Binary I/P","Binary O/P" ,"LED" , "Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6 Changing the Settings

The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:

Password

Description

Relay address and IP address Baud rate in IEC60870-103 or Modbus IEC 61850 setting Recording setting

Status setting

Protection setting

Binary input setting

Binary output setting

LED setting

Control setting

Frequency setting

All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.

CAUTION Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group", "scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive) depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.

Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.

4.2.6.1 Setting Method There are three setting methods as follows:

- To enter a selected item

- To enter a text string

- To enter numerical values

To enter a selected item When the screen shown below is displayed, setting of the relay can be performed as follows.

67

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.

/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e )

> P a s s w o r d


C o m m s

R e c o r d

S t a t u s

P r o t e c t i o n

B i n a r y I / P

B i n a r y O / P

L E D

C o n t r o l

F r e q u e n c y

• Move the cursor to a setting item.

• Press the ENTER key.

To enter a text string Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n

> P l a n t n a m e


To select a character, use keys , ,

and

to move the blinking cursor down, up, left and right. "→" and "←" on the final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of 22 characters can be entered.

_

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f

g h i j K l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ * / + - < = > ! “ ♯

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

• Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the ENTER key.

• Move the blinking cursor to select a character.

• Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.

• Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.

68

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new character.

• Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the beginning.

To enter numerical values When the screen shown below is displayed, setting can be performed as follows:

The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The cursor can be moved to the upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys. If a setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.

/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r

T i m e 1 _ s

> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s

T i m e 2 2 . 0 s

O V 1 2 0 . 0 V

U V 6 0 . 0 V

Z P S 2 0 . 0 V

N P S 2 0 . 0 V

• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Press the

or

key to set a desired value. The value can be raised or lowered by pressing the

or

key. ,

• Press the ENTER key to enter the value.

• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.

To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.

• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new numerical value.

• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the line that is to be corrected by pressing the and keys and enter the new numerical value.

Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper one.

To complete the setting Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings are not yet used for operation, although they are stored in memory. To validate the new settings, take the following steps.

• Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

69

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?

E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N

• When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to commence operation using the new settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen will return to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries that have been made so far and to return to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

4.2.6.2 Password For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:

• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.

• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.

• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen before returning to the upper screen.

"Unmatch passwd!"

Re-entry is then requested.

• Select "Test" to set the password for the test.

Set the password in the same manner as that of "Setting" above.

Password trap After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change screens.

If "Set. (change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting (change)" or "Test" sub-menu screens.

70

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

S e t . ( c h a n g e )

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The "Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the same way as the first password setting.

If you forget the password

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen. The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. The data will be attached to records.

• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.

• Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.

/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n

> P l a n t n a m e


• To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.

• To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.

• To enter the name for Alarm∗, select "Alarm∗" on the "Description" screen.

_



g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ * / + - < = > ! “ ♯

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

• Enter the text string.

71

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.6.4 Communication

If the relay is linked with Modbus or optional communication, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:

• Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set.(change)" screen.

• Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.

/ 2 C o m m s

＞ A d d r . / P a r a m .

S w i t c h

• Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.

/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m .

M o d b u s _

> M o d b u s 1

I E C 1

I P 1 ‐ 1 0

I P 1 ‐ 2 0

I P 1 ‐ 3 0

I P 1 ‐ 4 0

S M 1 ‐ 1 0

S M 1 ‐ 2 0

S M 1 ‐ 3 0

S M 1 ‐ 4 0

G W 1 ‐ 1 0

G W 1 ‐ 2 0

G W 1 ‐ 3 0

G W 1 ‐ 4 0

I P 2 ‐ 1 0

I P 2 ‐ 2 0

I P 2 ‐ 3 0

I P 2 ‐ 4 0

S M 2 ‐ 1 0

S M 2 ‐ 2 0

S M 2 ‐ 3 0

S M 2 ‐ 4 0

G W 2 ‐ 1 0

G W 2 ‐ 2 0

G W 2 ‐ 3 0

G W 2 ‐ 4 0

This setting is displayed if submodel of

communication type is A-D.


communication type is B or D.

This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in

comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.

72

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

I E C B 1 1

I E C B 2 2

I E C B 3 3

I E C B 4 4

I E C G T 1

I E C A T 1

I E C B T 1

I E C C T 1

I E C E 1 0

I E C E 2 0

I E C E 3 0

I E C E 4 0

I E C E 5 0

I E C E 6 0

I E C E 7 0

I E C E 8 0

I E C I 1 0

I E C I 2 0

I E C I 3 0

I E C I 4 0

I E C I 5 0

I E C I 6 0

I E C I 7 0

I E C I 8 0

I E C 2 B 1 1

I E C 2 B 2 2

I E C 2 B 3 3

I E C 2 B 4 4

I E C 2 G T 1

I E C 2 A T 1

I E C 2 B T 1

I E C 2 C T 1

I E C 2 E 1 0

I E C 2 E 2 0

I E C 2 E 3 0

I E C 2 E 4 0

I E C 2 E 5 0

I E C 2 E 6 0

I E C 2 E 7 0

I E C 2 E 8 0

I E C 2 I 1 0

I E C 2 I 2 0



This setting is displayed if submodel of communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.

73

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

I E C 2 I 3 0

I E C 2 I 4 0

I E C 2 I 5 0

I E C 2 I 6 0

I E C 2 I 7 0

I E C 2 I 8 0

S M O D E 0

G O I N T 1 s

D E A D T 1 s

• Enter the relay address number on the "Modbus" line for Modbus or the "IEC" line for IEC60870-5-103 and press the ENTER key.

• Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI2-4. two SNTP servers are available. Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".

Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG2-4 if Ping response is checked.

IP address: ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗ (IP1-1. IP1-2. IP1-3. IP1-4) and (IP2-1. IP2-2. IP2-3. IP2-4) SM1-1 to SM2-4, GW1-1 to GW2-4, SI1-1 to SI2-4: same as above.

• Press the ENTER key.

CAUTION: Do not duplicate the relay address number.

Settings for IEC60870-5-103 communication

The lines "IECB1" to "IECB4" are used for auxiliary inputs for IEC103 events INF27 to INF30 in Appendix N. Assign signals to the columns "IECB1" to "IECB4" by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix B.

The lines "IECGT" to "IECCT" are used for fault indications for IEC103 events INF68 to INF71 in Appendix N. Assign signals to the columns "IECGT" to "IECCT" by entering the BO numbers (1 to 8) corresponding to the binary output settings.

The lines "IECE1" to "IECE8" are used to assign the signals for user customization. Assign signals to the columns "IECE1" to "IECE8" by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix B.

Note: Assign "0" to the column when the function is not used.

The lines "IECI1" to "IECI8" are used to assign the above signals from "IECE1" to "IECE8" to each INF number. Enter the INF number to the columns "IECI1" to "IECI8".

Settings for IEC61850 communication

Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive time of IEC 16850 communication.

Setting for Modbus communication

This setting is displayed if submodel of communication

type is 2 and “RS485P” in comms switch settimg

is ”IEC103”.

This setting is displayed if submodel of communication type is A-D and “RS485P” in comms switch settimg is ”off”.

This setting is displayed if submodel of communication type is A-D.

74

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud rate), etc., for Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 and IEC61850.

/ 3 S w i t c h

R S 4 8 5 B R

> R S 4 8 5 B R

9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2

I E C B L K 0

N o r m a l / B l o c k e d

R S 4 8 5 P 0

O f f / M o d / I E C 1 0 3

E t h e r P 0

O f f / I E C 6 1 8 5 0

6 1 8 5 0 B L K 0

N o r m a l / B l o c k e d

T S T M O D 0

O f f / O n

G S E C H K 0

O f f / O n

P I N G C H K 0

O f f / O n

I E C G I 1 0

N o / Y e s

I E C G I 2 0

N o / Y e s

I E C G I 3 0

N o / Y e s

I E C G I 4 0

N o / Y e s

I E C G I 5 0

N o / Y e s

I E C G I 6 0

N o / Y e s

I E C G I 7 0

N o / Y e s

I E C G I 8 0

N o / Y e s

I E C 2 G I 1 0

N o / Y e s

I E C 2 G I 2 0

N o / Y e s

This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in comms

switch settimg is ”IEC103”.

This setting is displayed if submodel of communication

type is A0-D0.

This setting is displayed if submodel of communication type is A-D and “RS485P” in comms switch settimg is ”off”.




communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in




75

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

I E C 2 G I 3 0

N o / Y e s

I E C 2 G I 4 0

N o / Y e s

I E C 2 G I 5 0

N o / Y e s

I E C 2 G I 6 0

N o / Y e s

I E C 2 G I 7 0

N o / Y e s

I E C 2 G I 8 0

N o / Y e s

I E C N F I 0

1 . 2 / 2 . 4

<RS485BR> This line is to select the baud rate when the Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols are applied.

<IECBLK> Enter 1(=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.

<IECNFI > This line is to select the normalized factor (1.2 or 2.4) of the current measurand.

<IECGI1 - 8 > These lines are to use the GI (General Interrogation) or not for user customized signals. If GI is to be used , enter 1(=Yes).

<RS485P> This line is to select the communication protocol when the MODBUS or IEC60850-5-103 system applied.

<EtherP> This line is to select the communication protocol when the IEC61850 system applied.

<61850BLK> Select 1 (=Blocked) to block transmission from relay to BCU for IEC61850 communication. When using the IEC61850 communication, select 0 (=Normal).

<TSTMOD> Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.

<GSECHK> This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file cannot be received.

Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.

<PINGCHK> This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a ‘Ping’ to IP address which is set on PG∗-∗.

Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.

This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in comms



communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in comms


76

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Select the number and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording function To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:

• Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.

• Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.

/ 2 R e c o r d

> E v e n t

D i s t u r b a n c e

C o u n t e r

Setting the event recording


/ 3 E v e n t

B I 1 c o m m . _

> B I 1 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 2 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 3 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 4 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 5 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

B I 6 c o m m . 3

N / O / R / B

• Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and press the ENTER key.

Setting the disturbance recording



> T i m e / S t a r t e r

S c h e m e s w

B i n a r y s i g .

• Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.

77

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r

T i m e 1 _ s

> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s

T i m e 2 2 . 0 s

O V 1 2 0 . 0 V

U V 6 0 . 0 V

Z P S 2 0 . 0 V

N P S 2 0 . 0 V

• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set each starter to either used or not used, do the following:

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T r i p _

> T r i p 1

O f f / O n

B I 1

O f f / O n

O V 1

O f f / O n

U V 1

O f f / O n

Z P S 1

O f f / O n

N P S 1

O f f / O n

F R Q 1

O f f / O n

D F R Q 1

O f f / O n

• Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:

• Select "Binary sig." on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.

/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .

S I G 1 _

> S I G 1 5 1

S I G 2 5 1

S I G 3 5 1

S I G 4 5 1

78

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

S I G 3 2 5 1

• Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix A.

Setting the counter


/ 3 C o u n t e r

> S c h e m e s w

A l a r m s e t

To set each counter to either used or not used , do the following:

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 4 S c h e m e s w

T C S P E N _

> T C S P E N 1

O f f / O n / O p t - O n

C B S M E N 1

O f f / O n

T C A E N 1

O f f / O n

• Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set the threshold setting, do the following:

• Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.

/ 4 A l a r m s e t

T C A L M _

> T C A L M 1 0 0 0 0

• Enter the threshold settings.

4.2.6.6 Status

To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:

Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.

/ 2 S t a t u s

> M e t e r i n g

T i m e s y n c .

T i m e z o n e


communication type is A-D.

79

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting the metering

• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 3 M e t e r i n g

D i s p l a y _

> D i s p l a y 1

P r i / S e c

• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 for Display.

Enter 0(=Pri.) to display the primary side voltage in kilo-volts(kV).

Enter 1(=Sec.) to display the secondary side voltage.

Setting the time synchronization The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal or Modbus or IEC103 or SNTP. This is selected by setting as follows.

• Select "Time sync." to display the "Time sync" screen.

/ 3 T i m e s y n c .

T i m e s y n c . _

> T i m e s y n c . 1

O f f / B I / M o d / 1 0 3 /

S N T P

• Enter 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.

Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.

Enter 2(=Mod) to be synchronised with the Modbus.

Enter 3(=103) to be synchronised with the IEC103.

Enter 4(=SNTP) to be synchronised with the SNTP.

Note: When selecting BI or Modbus, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in "Status" sub-menu.

If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)

If it is set to an inactive BI or Modbus, the calendar clock runs locally.

Setting the time zone

When the calendar clock is synchronized with the SNTP time standard, it is possible to transform GMT to the local time.

• Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.

• Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hours) and

80

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

GMTm (minutes), and press the ENTER key.

/ 3 T i m e z o n e .

G M T _

> G M T + 0 h r s

G M T m + 0 m i n

4.2.6.7 Protection

The GRE130 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the following:

• Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.

/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n

> C h a n g e a c t . g p .

C h a n g e s e t

C o p y g p .

Changing the active group

• Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.

/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .

g p .

A c t i v e g p . _

> A c t i v e g p . 1

• Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.

Changing the settings Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the default values, see Appendix G. To change the settings, do the following:

• Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.

/ 3 A c t g p . = 1

> C o m m o n

G r o u p 1

G r o u p 2

81

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Changing the Common settings

• Select "Common" to set the voltage input state and input imbalance monitoring and press the ENTER key.

/ 4 C o m m o n

A P P L _

> A P P L 1

1 P P / 1 P N / 2 P P / 2 P Z

3 P N / 3 P V / 3 P P

A O L E D

O f f / O n

<APPL>

• Enter 0(=1PP), 1(=1PN), 3(=2PP), 4(=2PZ), 5(=3PN), 6(=3PV) or 7(=3PP) to set the voltage input state and press the ENTER key.

<AOLED> This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED light when an alarm element is output.

• Enter 1 (=On) to illuminate the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Changing the Group settings

• Select the "Group∗" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER key.

/ 4 G r o u p ＊

> P a r a m e t e r

T r i p

Setting the parameter Enter the line name, the VT ratio and the fault locator as follows:

• Select "Parameter" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Parameter" screen.

/ 5 P a r a m e t e r

> L i n e n a m e

V T r a t i o

• Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen. • Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key. • Select "VT ratio" to display the "VT ratio" screen.

82

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 6 V T r a t i o

P V T _

> P V T 1 0 0

R V T 1 0 0

• Enter the VT ratio and press the ENTER key.

Setting the trip function To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.

• Select "Trip" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Trip" screen.

/ 5 T r i p

> S c h e m e s w

P r o t . e l e m e n t

Setting the scheme switch

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.

/ 6 S c h e m e s w

> A p p l i c a t i o n

O V p r o t .

U V p r o t .

Z P S p r o t .

N P S p r o t .

F R Q p r o t .

Setting the application To set the application setting, do the following.

• Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.

/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n

S V C N T _

> S V C N T 1

A L M & B L K / A L M

<SVCNT> Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automatic supervision and AC input imbalance supervision.

• Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the ENTER key.

83

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting the OV protection The settings for the OV protection are as follows:

• Select "OV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V p r o t .

O V 1 E N _

> O V 1 E N 1

O f f / D T / I M D T / C

O V 2 E N 1


O V 3 E N 1

O f f / O n

<OV1EN>, <OV2EN> To set the OV1 and OV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV1 or OV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<OV3EN>

• Enter 1 (=On) to enable the OV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OV3, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.



• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.

Setting the UV protection The settings for the UV protection are as follows:

• Select "UV" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "UV" screen.

/ 7 U V p r o t .

U V 1 E N _

> U V 1 E N 1


U V 2 E N 1


U V 3 E N 1

O f f / O n

V B L K E N 1

O f f / O n

84

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

<UV1EN>, <UV2EN> To set the UV1 and UV2 delay type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV1 or UV2, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

<UV3EN> • Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV3, and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV3, enter 0

(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





<VBLKEN> • Enter 1 (=On) to enable the UV blocking and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UV

blocking, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.

Setting the ZPS Protection The settings for the ZPS protection are as follows:

• Select "ZPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.

/ 7 Z P S p r o t

Z P S 1 E N _

> Z P S 1 E N 1

O f f / D T / I D M T / C

Z P S 2 E N 1


<ZPS1EN>, <ZPS2EN> To set the ZPS1 and ZPS2 time delayed type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the ZPS1 or ZPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





85

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting the NPS protection The settings for the NPS protection are as follows:

• Select "NPS" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "NPS" screen.

/ 7 N P S p r o t

N P S 1 E N _

> N P S 1 E N 1


N P S 2 E N 1


<NPS1EN>, <NPS2EN> To set the NPS1 and NPS2 time delayed type, do the following.

• Enter 1 (=DT) or 2 (=IDMT) or 3 (=C: configurable curve) and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NPS1 or NPS2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.





Setting the FRQ protection The settings for the FRQ (over/under frequency) protection are as follows:

• Select "FRQ" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q p r o t

F T 1 _

> F T 1 1

O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

D F T 1 1

O f f / R / D / B o t h

L o g i c 1

L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

F T 2 0

O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

D F T 2 0

O f f / R / D / B o t h

L o g i c 2

L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

F T 3 0

86

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

D F T 3 0

O f f / R / D / B o t h

L o g i c 3

L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

F T 4 0

O f f / O / U / B / O O / U U

D F T 4 0

O f f / R / D / B o t h

L o g i c 4

L 1 / L 2 / L 3 / L 4 / L 5

<FT1>,<FT2>,<FT3>,<FT4>

FT1, FT2, FT3 and FT4 select the frequency protection.

• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (=Off) not to use the frequency protection.

Enter 1 (=O) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used.

Enter 2 (=U) to use the F11 element for underfrequency protection. The F12 element is not used

Enter 3 (=B) to use the F11 element for overfrequency protection and the F12 element for underfrequency protection.

Enter 4 (=OO) to use the F11 and F12 elements for overfrequency protection.

Enter 5 (=UU) to use the F11 and F12 elements for underfrequency protection.

<DFT1>, <DFT2>, <DFT3>, <DFT4>

DFT1, DFT2, DFT3 and DFT4 select the frequency rate-of-change protection.

• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0 (= Off) not to use the frequency rise rate nor frequency decay rate protection.

Enter 1 (= R) to use only the frequency rise rate protection.

Enter 2 (= D) to use only the frequency decay rate protection.

Enter 3 (= Both) to use both the frequency rise rate and frequency decay rate protections.

<Logic 1>, <Logic 2>, <Logic3>, <Logic 4>

Logic 1, Logic 2, Logic 3 and Logic 4 select the tripping combination of the frequency protection and the frequency rate-of-change protection.

• Enter 0 (=L1) or 1 (=L2) or 2 (=L3) or 3 (=L4) or 4 (=L5) and press the ENTER key. Refer to Table 2.2.1 for setting.

Setting the protection elements To set the protection elements, do the following.

• Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.

87

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t

> O V p r o t .

U V p r o t .

Z P S p r o t

N P S p r o t

F R Q p r o t

Setting the OV elements

• Select "OV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OV" screen.

/ 7 O V p r o t . O V 1 _ V

> O V 1 1 0 . 0 V OV1 Threshold setting. T O V 1 1 . 0 0 S OV1 Definite time delay. T O V 1 M 1 . 0 0 OV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. T O V 1 R 0 . 0 s OV1 Definite time reset delay. O V 1 D P R 9 5 % OV1 DO/PU ratio

O V 2 1 0 . 0 V OV2 Threshold setting. T O V 2 1 . 0 0 S OV2 Definite time delay. T O V 2 M 1 . 0 0 OV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. T O V 2 R 0 . 0 s OV2 Definite time reset delay. O V 2 D P R 9 5 % OV2 DO/PU ratio

O V 3 1 0 . 0 V OV3 Threshold setting. T O V 3 1 . 0 0 S OV3 Definite time delay. O V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 OV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

O V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

O V 1 - C 0 . 0 0 ditto

O V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 OV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

O V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

O V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.




• Press the ENTER (= Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.

88

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting the UV elements

• Select "UV" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "UV" screen.

/ 7 U V p r o t . U V 1 _ V

> U V 1 5 . 0 V UV1 Threshold setting. T U V 1 0 . 0 5 S UV1 Definite time delay. T U V 1 M 0 . 0 5 UV1 Inverse time multiplier setting. T U V 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV1 Definite time reset delay. U V 2 4 0 . 0 V UV2 Threshold setting. T U V 2 0 . 0 5 S UV2 Definite time delay.

T U V 2 M 0 . 0 5 UV2 Inverse time multiplier setting. T U V 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s UV2 Definite time reset delay. U V 3 1 0 . 0 V UV3 Threshold setting. T U V 3 1 . 0 0 S UV3 Definite time delay. V B L K 1 0 . 0 V UV Blocking threshold U V 1 - k 1 . 0 0 UV1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

U V 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

U V 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

U V 2 - k 1 . 0 0 UV2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

U V 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

U V 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto






Setting the ZPS elements

• Select "ZPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "ZPS" screen.

/ 7 Z P S p r o t Z P S 1 _ V

> Z P S 1 5 . 0 V ZPS1 Threshold setting. T Z P S 1 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 1 Definite time delay. T Z P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting. T Z P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 1 Definite time reset delay. Z P S 2 4 0 . 0 V ZPS 2 Threshold setting.

89

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

T Z P S 2 0 . 0 5 S ZPS 2 Definite time delay.

T Z P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 ZPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting. T Z P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s ZPS 2 Definite time reset delay. Z P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

Z P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 ZPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

Z P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

Z P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto






Setting the NPS protection elements

• Select "NPS" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "NPS" screen.

/ 7 N P S p r o t N P S 1 _ V

> N P S 1 5 . 0 V NPS1 Threshold setting. T N P S 1 0 . 0 5 S NPS 1 Definite time delay. T N P S 1 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 1 Inverse time multiplier setting. T N P S 1 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 1 Definite time reset delay. N P S 2 4 0 . 0 V NPS 2 Threshold setting. T N P S 2 0 . 0 5 S NPS 2 Definite time delay.

T N P S 2 M 0 . 0 5 NPS 2 Inverse time multiplier setting. T N P S 2 R 1 0 0 . 0 s NPS 2 Definite time reset delay. N P S 1 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 1 User configurable IDMT curve setting

N P S 1 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 1 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 2 - k 1 . 0 0 NPS 2 User configurable IDMT curve setting

N P S 2 - a 1 . 0 0 ditto

N P S 2 - c 0 . 0 0 ditto


90

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6





Setting the FRQ elements

• Select "FRQ" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "FRQ" screen.

/ 7 F R Q p r o t F 1 1 _ H z

> F 1 1 5 . 0 H z F11 for FRQ1 threshold setting. T F 1 1 0 . 0 5 S F11 Definite time delay. F 1 2 5 . 0 H z F12 for FRQ1 Threshold setting. T F 1 2 0 . 0 5 S F12 Definite time delay. D F 1 0 . 5 H z / s DF1 for FRQ1 of DFRQ1 Threshold setting.

F 2 1 5 . 0 H z F21 for FRQ2 threshold setting. T F 2 1 0 . 0 5 S F21 Definite time delay. F 2 2 5 . 0 H z F22 for FRQ2 Threshold setting. T F 2 2 0 . 0 5 S F22 Definite time delay. D F 2 0 . 5 H z / s DF2 for FRQ2 of DFRQ2 Threshold setting. F 3 1 5 . 0 H z F31 for FRQ3 threshold setting. T F 3 1 0 . 0 5 S F31 Definite time delay. F 3 2 5 . 0 H z F32 for FRQ3 Threshold setting. T F 3 2 0 . 0 5 S F32 Definite time delay. D F 3 0 . 5 H z / s DF3 for FRQ3 of DFRQ3 Threshold setting. F 4 1 5 . 0 H z F41 for FRQ4 threshold setting. T F 4 1 0 . 0 5 S F41 Definite time delay. F 4 2 5 . 0 H z F42 for FRQ4 Threshold setting. T F 4 2 0 . 0 5 S F42 Definite time delay. D F 4 0 . 5 H z / s DF4 for FRQ4 of DFRQ4 Threshold setting.





91

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6


Setting group copy To copy the settings from one settings group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:

• Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.

/ 3 C ｏｐｙ A t o B

> A _

B _

• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.

• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.

4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic. Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.

• Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / P

> B I S t a t u s

B I 1

B I 2

B I 3

B I 4

B I 5

B I 6

A l a r m 1 T e x t

A l a r m 2 T e x t

A l a r m 3 T e x t

A l a r m 4 T e x t

Setting Binary Input Status

The binary input nominal operating voltage can be selected in GRE130. Control voltages of 24V, 48V, 110V and 220V are supported.

BI1 and BI2 can be set to one of three nominal voltages - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)

BI3 to BI6 can be set to one of two nominal voltages – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)

Note: The nominal voltage 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Supervision using 2 Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.

The threshold voltage options of 48-220V and 12-48V correspond to the dc auxiliary voltage supply rating of the relay models.

To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:

• Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.

92

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/ 3 B I S t a t u s

B I T H R 1

> B I T H R 1 1

4 8 / 1 1 0 / 2 2 0

B I T H R 2 0

1 1 0 / 2 2 0

<BITHR1> To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 1 and 2 , do the following.

• Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER key.

<BITHR2> To set the threshold voltage for Binary Inputs 3 to 6 , do the following.

• Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER key.

Selection of Binary Input

• Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.

After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.

/ 3 B I 1

> T i m e r s

F u n c t i o n s

Setting Alarm ∗ Text

If the BI selected is used for an alarm, an alarm message can be set.

• Select the Alarm∗ text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.

_



g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v

w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )

[ ] @ _ * / + - < = > ! “ ♯

$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `

• Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.

After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.

93

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting timers

• Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.

/ 4 T i m e r s

B I 1 P U D _ s

> B I 1 P U D 0 . 0 0 s Pick-up delay setting

B I 1 D O D 0 . 0 0 s Drop-off delay setting


• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.

Setting Functions

• Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n

B I 1 S N S _

> B I 1 S N S 0

N o r m / I n v

B I 1 S G S 0

O f f / 1 / 2

O V 1 B L K 0

O f f / O n

O V 2 B L K 0

O f f / O n

O V 3 B L K 0

O f f / O n

U V 1 B L K 0

O f f / O n

U V 2 B L K 0

O f f / O n

U V 3 B L K 0

O f f / O n

Z P S B L K 0

O f f / O n

N P S B L K 0

O f f / O n

F R Q B L K 0

O f f / O n

• To set the Binary Input Sense, enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.


94

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

<BI1SNS>

To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.

• Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.

<BI1SGS>

To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.

• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) and press the ENTER key.

<Others>

• Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER key. If not setting the function, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.


4.2.6.9 Binary Output All the binary outputs of the GRE130 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available signals are listed in Appendix C.

It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.

Appendix G shows the factory default settings.

CAUTION When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.

To configure the binary output signals, do the following:

Selection of output relay

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

B O 5 Available for model 412.




Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

95

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗" screen.

/ 3 B O ∗

> L o g i c / R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

Setting the logic gate type and timer

• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.

/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t

L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s / D I / D w / L a t

• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals

• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 4 F u n c t i o n s

I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1 －－－

I n ♯ 2 －－－

I n ♯ 3 －－－

I n ♯ 4 －－－

T B O 0 . 2 0 s

• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix A. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 176 (signal names: "BO1 OP" to "BO8 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #6, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.

96

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

CAUTION

The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key is linked to BO2, when the control function is enabled.

4.2.6.10 LEDs Six of the LEDs provided by the GRE130 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to indicate an OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual status of which can be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix A can be assigned to each LED as follows.

CAUTION When having changed the LED settings, release the latch state on the digest screen by pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.

Selection of LEDs

• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.

/ 2 L E D

> L E D

V i r t u a l L E D

Selection of real LEDs

• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

/ 3 L E D

> L E D 1

L E D 2

L E D 3

L E D 4

L E D 5

L E D 6

C B C L O S E D

Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.

/ 4 L E D ∗


F u n c t i o n s

L E D C o l o r

97

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting the logic gate type and reset type



L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s t / L a t c h

• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen. Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals

• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.


I n # 1 _

> I n # 1 －－－

I n # 2 －－－

I n # 3 －－－

I n # 4 －－－

• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix A.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.


Setting the LED color

• Select "LED color" on the "LED∗ " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the "LED color" screen.

/ 5 L E D C o l o r

C o l o r _

> C o l o r 0

R / G / Y

98

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Select the LED color from red, green or yellow.


Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.

Selection of virtual LEDs

• Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.

/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D

> I N D 1

I N D 2

• Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND∗" screen.

/ 4 I N D 1

> R e s e t

F u n c t i o n s

Setting the reset timing

• Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.

/ 5 R e s e t

R e s e t _

> R e s e t 0

I n s t / L a t c h

• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key. • Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.

Assigning signals

• Select "Functions" on the "IND∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.

/ 5 F n c t i o n s

B I T 1 _

> B I T 1 －－－

B I T 2 －－－

B I T 3 －－－

B I T 4 －－－

B I T 5 －－－

B I T 6 －－－

B I T 7 －－－

B I T 8 －－－

99

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix A.

Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).

• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.


4.2.6.11 Control The GRE130 can control the Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close by using the front panel keys.

The interlock function can be used to block the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command with interlock signals from binary inputs or from a communication command.

To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:

• Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.

/ 2 C o n t r o l

C o n t r o l _

> C o n t r o l 0

D i s a b l e / E n a b l e

I n t e r l o c k 0


• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the control function to be in use or not in use and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the interlock function to be in use or not in use and press the ENTER key.

Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.

4.2.6.12 Frequency Setting of the system frequency for the GRE130 relay for 50Hz or 60Hz.

To change the system frequency, do the following:

• Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.

/ 2 F r e q u e n c y

F r e q u e n c y _

> F r e q u e n c y 0

5 0 H z / 6 0 H z

• Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the ENTER key.

100

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

CAUTION When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE130 must reboot to enable the setting change.

When having changed the system frequency, the frequency protection setting value must be changed for the system frequency.

4.2.7 Control

The sub-menu "Control" enables the Circuit Breaker(CB) control function from the front panel keys - , ｜ and L/R .

Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.

4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Control The "Local/Remote" function provides for change of CB control hierarchy.

• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

> P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

L o c a l / R e m o t e

C B c l o s e / o p e n

• Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on the LCD.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

> L o c a l / R e m o t e

C B c l o s e / o p e n

• The L/R key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy.

4.2.7.2 CB close / open Control The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.

• Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.

/ 1 C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )

L o c a l / R e m o t e

> C B c l o s e / o p e n

• The ｜ and keys are enabled to control the CB – close / open.

101

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2.7.3 Password For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:

• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.



C o n t r o l

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


C o n t r o l

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


"Unmatch passwd!"


Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the control screens.

If "Control" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Control" sub-menu screens.

C o n t r o l

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The "Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.


102

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6


Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen. The password protection for the GRE130 is canceled. Set the password again.

4.2.8 Testing

The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and forced operation of binary outputs.

Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a testing state.

4.2.8.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".

Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure of the items that are being monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.

Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.

• Select "Test" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.

/ 1 T e s t

> P a s s w o r d ( T e s t )

S w i t c h

B i n a r y O / P

• Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.

/ 2 S w i t h

A . M . F _

> A . M . F 1

O f f / O n

U V T S T 0

O f f / O n

• Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 1(=On) for UVTST to disable the UV block when testing UV elements and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.

4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections to external

103

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD displays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0


B O 2 0


B O 3 0


B O 4 0


F A I L 0


• Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to forcibly operate the output relays.

• After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ?


• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.

• Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

• Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.

4.2.8.3 Password For the sake of security during testing, password protection can be set as follows:

• Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.



T e s t

I n p u t [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


104

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

T e s t

R e t y p e [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


"Unmatch passwd!"


Password trap

After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change screens.

If "Test" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Test" sub-menu screens.

T e s t

P a s s w o r d [ _ ]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜


To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The "Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.



Press the CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen. The screen will go off, and the password protection of the GRE130 is cancelled. Set the password again.

105

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel. Using a personal computer, the following analysis and display of fault currents are available in addition to the items available on the LCD screen.

• Display of current waveform: Oscillograph display

• Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span

• Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span

• Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span

For details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

4.4 Modbus Interface

GRE130 supports the Modbus communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurement and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix L.)

• Measurement data: current

• Status data: events, fault indications, counters, etc.

• Setting data

• Remote CB operation: Open / Close

• Time setting / synchronization

The protocol can be used via the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.

The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.

4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface The GRE130 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurand and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix N.)

• Measurand data: current

• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.

The protocol can be used through the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.

The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors 1.2 and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.

The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.

For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.

4.6 IEC 61850 Communication GRE130 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard with the provision of an optional communication board. Station bus communication as specified in IEC 61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within a substation control and automation system via Ethernet LAN.

106

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC 61850 communication.

Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network

4.7 Clock Function The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:

• Event records

• Disturbance records

• Fault records

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with an external clock such as the binary time standard input signal or Modbus. This can be selected by setting.

The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input every second.

Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the number of seconds is incremented).

When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100" and "RSM" is selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with an external time standard, then all the relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.

corrected to (n+1) sec 500ms

n sec (n+1) sec

corrected to n sec

t

or TX

107

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.8 Special Mode The GRE130 will enter the following special mode using a specific key operation.

• LCD contrast adjustment mode

• Light check mode

LCD contrast adjustment mode

When the LCD is not evident or not displayed clearly, it may be that the contrast adjustment for the LCD may not be appropriate. To adjust the contrast of the LCD screen on any of the screens, do the following:

• Press and ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to the LCD contrast adjustment mode.

L C D C o n t r a s t

• Press the

or

key to adjust the contrast.

LCD and LED check mode

To exercise the LCD and LED check , do the following.

• Press

key for 3 seconds or more when the LCD is off.

• While pressing

key all LEDs are lit and white dots will appear on the whole LCD screen.

The colors of the configurable LEDs (LED1-6) can be chosen in the user setting color.

• Release

key , to finish the LCD and LED check mode.

IN SERVICE

TRIP

ALARM

RELAY FAIL

CB CLOSED CB OPEN LOCAL REMOTE

User configurable

LEDs (LED1-6)

108

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

5. Installation 5.1 Receipt of Relays

When relays are received, carry out an acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.

Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.

5.2 Relay Mounting

The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.

Appendix E shows the case outlines.

14

513

5

127

117

Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of attachment kit

The attachment kits can be mounted on a panel thickness of 1 – 2.5mm when the M4x8 screws included with the kit are used. When mounted on a panel thickness of 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screws together with some spacing washers should be used.

5.2.1 Flush Mounting

For flush mounting in a panel cut-out;

・Mount the case in the panel cut-out from the front of the panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.

・Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.

・Tighten the M4 screws from the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.4.

The allowed range for the fixing screw tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm.

Do not tighten the screws too tightly.

109

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

(a) model 410A and 411A

160

217+0.2-0.2

+0.2

-0.2

(b) model 412A

Fig. 5.2.2 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out

110

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Fig. 5.2.3 Side view of GRE130 showing the positions of the mounting attachment kit

(a) model 410A, 411A (b) model 412A

Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of GRE130 showing the screw location for the mounting attachment kits

5.2.2 Dimensions

5.2.2.1 Power Supply The power supply for the relay can be either DC (range 24-48Vdc, 48-110Vdc, 110-250Vdc) or AC (110-220Vac-50/60Hz). The voltage range is specified on the relay indicator plate on the front face. On models 410A and 411A, the power supply should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of TB1 and the earthing should be connected to terminal 12 of TB1.

On model 412A, the power supply should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of TB2 and the

111

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

earthing should be connected to terminal 12 of TB2.

A minimum 1.25mm2 wire size recommended.

5.2.2.2 Analogue inputs GRE130-410A, 411A and 412A have 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth voltage.

On models 410A and 411A, the voltage inputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 8 of TB1.

A minimum 2.5 mm2 wire size recommended.

The voltage input and power supply terminals (TB1 or TB2) can be connected from both sides.

5.2.2.3 Binary inputs The relay has 2 (or 6) opto-insulated logic inputs. Each input has is separately powered with a dc voltage.

On models 410A and 411A, the binary inputs should be connected to terminals 13 to 16 (or 22) of TB2.

On model 412A, the binary inputs should be connected to terminals 13 to 16 (or 22) of TB3.

A minimum 1.25 mm2 wire size is recommended.

5.2.2.4 Binary outputs (Output relays) Five output relays are available on the relay. Four relays are programmable, the last relay being assigned to the signaling of a relay fault. BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

On models 410A and 411A, the binary outputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 10 of TB2.

On model 412A, the binary outputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 10 of TB3.

A minimum 1.25 mm2 wire size is recommended.

5.2.2.5 RS485 port The communication connection (RS485 port) is assigned to terminals 21, 23 and 24 of TB2 at model 410A and 411A or TB3 at model 412A. The total length of twisted pair wires should not exceed 1200 m.

The transmission wires should be terminated using a 120Ω resistor at both extreme ends of the cable.

The binary input , binary output and RS485 communication terminal is a single side connected terminal block.

The relay terminal block size and the clearance between the terminals are shown at Fig 5.2.4.

112

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

TB1TB2

6.35

7.62

8.7

10.0

17 24

TB3 TB2 TB1

2417 42

6.35

7.62

8.7

10.0

6.35

7.62

(a) model 410A1 and 411A (b) model 412A

Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of the relay

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION

Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

5.4 Handling Precautions A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage. Often, this damage may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage.

The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and manufactured.

CAUTION

• Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

• Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same potential as yourself.

• Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.

It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried out in a Special Handling Area.

113

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

5.5 External Connections

External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix F.

5.6 Optinal case model S1-GRE130 GRE130 has optional case model S1-GRE130. Details are shown in 6F2T0195.

114

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6. Commissioning and Maintenance 6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests

The GRE130 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.

Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.

In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully utilised.

Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.

Hardware tests

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits function when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces Binary input circuits and output circuits AC input circuits

Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.

Measuring elements Metering and recording

Conjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external equipment.

The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check Tripping circuit test

6.2 Cautions

6.2.1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION

• When connecting the cable to the rear of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach the cover provided for the terminal block .

• Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

115

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.2.2 Precautions for Testing

CAUTION

• When the power is on, do not draw out/insert the relay unit. • Before turning the power on, check the following:

- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct. - Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited. • Be careful to ensure that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage. • If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.

Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.

6.3 Preparations

Test equipment

The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.

1 Single-phase voltage source 1 Three-phase voltage source 1 power supply 3 Phase angle meter 3 AC ammeter 3 AC voltmeter 1 Time counter, precision timer 1 PC (not essential)

Relay settings

Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the default settings.

For the default settings, see the Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet.

Visual inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.

Relay ratings

Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage and frequency ratings, and auxiliary supply voltage rating.

Local PC

When using a local PC, connect it to the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100 software is required to run the PC.

For full details, see separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".

116

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a power supply and AC current and voltage sources are required.

The testing circuit figures used in this chapter show the circuit diagram for the 410A and 411A models. In the case of the 412A model, TB1 replaces TB2 and TB2 replaces TB3.

6.4.1 User Interfaces

This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

LCD ･LED display

• Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit green.

Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the supply voltage is applied.

• Press

key for 3 seconds or longer and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and that all LEDs are lit.

Operation keys

• Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN MENU" screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.

• Press the ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN MENU" screen. Press any keys to check that they operate.

6.4.2 Binary Input Circuits

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.

GRE130

-13

TB 2

-14

power supply

+

−

BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6

- 13

- 14

-12

TB 1

- 19

- 20

Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit

117

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O

I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]

O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]

• Apply the rated supply voltage to terminals 13-14, 15-16, 17,18,19,20-21 of terminal block TB2. Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)

The user will be able to perform this test from one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.

6.4.3 Binary Output Circuits

This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays the name of the output relay.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0


B O 2 0


B O 3 0


B O 4 0


F A I L 0


• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.

• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed collectively.

118

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

O p e r a t e ?


• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.

• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation

6.4.4 AC Input Circuits

This test can be performed by applying check currents to the AC input circuits and verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.


V A

V B

V C

TB1

power supply

+

−

- 13

- 14

12

TB 1

GRE130

-1 -2 -3

Three-phase voltage source

V

-4

-5 -6

Single-phase voltage source

- 7

- 8

V

Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit

To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the following.

"Set. (view)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen

If the setting is 0 ( = Primary), change the setting to 1 (Secondary) in the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.

"Set. (change)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen

Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.

• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.

"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen

• Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within ±5% of the input values.

119

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5 Function Test CAUTION

The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays. Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.

6.5.1 Measuring Element Measuring element characteristics are realized using software, so it is possible to verify the overall characteristics by checking representative points.

Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable LED or a binary output relay.

Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for logic level "0".

CAUTION • Use test equipment with more than 1 kΩ of internal impedance when observing the output

signal at the monitoring jacks.

• Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.

• Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.

In the case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase element is selected hereafter. Further, the [APPLCT] settings are selected “3P” and “3PV”.

Note: The operating time test for the relay measuring elements at monitoring jacks A or B does not include operation of the binary output. An overall operating time test, if required, should be measured at a binary output relay.

Assigning signals to LEDs

• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.

/ 2 L E D

> L E D

V i r t u a l L E D

• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.

/ 3 L E D

> L E D 1

L E D 2

L E D 3

L E D 4

L E D 5

L E D 6

C B C L O S E D

Note: The setting is required for all of the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

120

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.

/ 4 L E D ∗


F u n c t i o n s

L E D C o l o r



L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s t / L a t c h

• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.


• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.


I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _

I n ♯ 2 _ _ _

I n ♯ 3 _ _ _

I n ♯ 4 _ _ _

• Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B, and assign other gates to “0”.

Assigning signals to Binary Output Relays

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

> B O 1

B O 2

B O 3

B O 4

121

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Note: The setting is required for all of the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.

• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗" screen.

/ 3 B O ∗


F u n c t i o n s



L o g i c _

> L o g i c 0

O R / A N D

R e s e t 0

I n s / D l / D w / L a t

• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.

• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.

• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.


I n ♯ 1 _

> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _

I n ♯ 2 _ _ _

I n ♯ 3 _ _ _

I n ♯ 4 _ _ _

T B O 0 . 2 0 s

• Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix A and assign other gates to “0”.

122

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5.1.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Value Test Circuit

Overvoltage and undervoltage elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.

Element Signal No. Element Signal No. OV1 101 UV1 122 OV2 108 UV2 126 OV3 115 UV3 130 ZPS1 134 ZPS2 135

• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.

• Apply a test voltage and change the magnitude of the voltage applied and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.

Operating value test of OV1, OV2, OV3, ZPS1, ZPS2

• Apply rated voltage as shown in Figure 6.5.1.

• Increase the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.

Operating value test of UV1, UV2, UV3

• Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown Figure 6.5.1.

• Decrease the voltage and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 5% of the setting.

Operating time check of OV1, UV1, ZPS1 IDMT curves

• Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the operating time.

• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section 2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Check the measured operating time.

TB 1 -

13

- 14

-12

GRE130

power supply

+

−

V

TB 1 +

−

Variable -

Voltage source

- 1

- 2

( ∗ ) : Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.

123

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5.1.2 Negative sequence overvoltage element NPS1 and NPS2


Three-phase Voltage source

TB1 -1

-3

-6

-5

Va

Vb

GRE130

-13

-14

-12

TB1 power supply

+ −

Vc

V

VN

Figure 6.5.2 Testing NOV elements

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:

Element Signal No. NPS1 136 NPS2 137

• Apply a three-phase balanced voltage and the check the value of the operating voltage by increasing the magnitude of the voltage applied.

Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.

Operating time check of NPS1 IDMT curve

• Change the voltage from the rated voltage to the test voltage quickly and measure the operating time.

• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section 2.1.4. Check the measured operating time.

124

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5.1.3 Frequency Elements


TB 1 - 13

- 14

GRE130

power supply

+

−

+

−

-1

- 2

V TB 1 f Variable- Frequency / Voltage source

-12

Figure 6.5.3 Operating Value Test Circuit

Frequency elements and their output signal numbers are listed below.

Element Signal No. FRQ1 FRQ2 FRQ3 FRQ4 FVBLK

251 252 253 254 255

Overfrequency or underfrequency elements FRQ1 to FRQ4 Note: Each element characteristic, overfrequency or underfrequency, is determined by the scheme

switch [FT1] to [FT4] settings. Check the scheme switch setting and characteristic of each element before testing .

• Apply rated voltage and frequency as shown in Figure 6.5.3.

For the overfrequency characteristic,

• Increase the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 0.005Hz of the setting.

For the underfrequency characteristics,

• Decrease the frequency and measure the value at which the element operates. Check that the measured value is within ± 0.005Hz of the setting.

Undervoltage block test, FVBLK

• Apply rated voltage and change the magnitude of the frequency to operate an element.

• Maintain the frequency at which the element is operating, and change the magnitude of the voltage applied from the rated voltage to less than the FVBLK setting voltage. And then, check that the element resets.

6.5.2 Protection Scheme In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault, fault and post-fault conditions.

Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays operate after a simulated fault occurs.

125

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.5.3 Metering and Recording

The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.

Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record" screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.

Recording events are listed in Appendix B. There are internal events and external events from binary input commands. Event recording from an external event can be checked by changing the status of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record" screen is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.

Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record" screen and check that the descriptions are correct.

Details can be displayed on a PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.

6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test

To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system voltage and their respective phase angles using the metering displays on the LCD screen.

• Open the "Auto-supervision" screen and check that no message appears.

• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g

V a * * . * * k V

V b * * . * * k V

V c * * . * * k V

V e s * * . * * k V

V a b * * . * * k V

V b c * * . * * k V

V c a * * . * * k V

V 1 * * * . * k V

V 2 * * * . * k V V 0 * * . * * k V

f * * . * * H z

Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values for either the primary side or the secondary side by a setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)

6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test

The tripping circuit, including the circuit breaker, is checked by forcibly operating the output relay and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it has tripped. Forcible operation of the output relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section 6.4.3.

126

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Tripping circuit

• Set the breaker to be closed.

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.

/ 2 B i n a r y O / P

B O 1 _

> B O 1 0


B O 2 0


B O 3 0


B O 4 0


F A I L 0


BO1 to BO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.

• Enter 1 for BO2 and press the ENTER key.

• Press the END key. Then the LCD will display the screen shown below.

O p e r a t e ?


• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO2 and check that the A-phase breaker is tripped.

• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

• Repeat the above for BO1, BO3 and BO4.

127

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

6.7 Maintenance

6.7.1 Regular Testing The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary input and output circuits and human interfaces.

Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.

6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued from the binary output FAIL relay and the failure is indicated on the front panel by the LED indicators or LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.

Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1 shows LCD messages and failure locations.

The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).

Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location

Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable

Err: SUM ×(Flash memory)

Err: RAM ×(SRAM)

Err: BRAM ×(Backup RAM)

Err: EEP ×(EEPROM)

Err: A/D ×(A/D converter)

Err: V0, Err: V2 × (AC input circuit)(1) × (2) Err: DRIVER × (BI,BO circuit)(1) × (2)

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.

* ; Error level set in VT supervision function.

Alarms detected by the relay self-supervision are traced by checking the "ALM: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.2 shows LCD messages and alarm locations.

Table 6.7.2 LCD Message and Alarm Location

Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable

ALM: VT ×(AC input circuit)(1) × (2)

ALM: TC ×(Trip circuit)(1) × (2)

ALM: CB ×(Circuit breaker)(1) × (2)

ALM: TP COUNT ×(Trip count)(1) × (2)

( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including peripheral circuits.

128

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

If there is no message is shown on the LCD it means that the failure location is either in the power supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit in both cases after checking if the correct voltage is applied to the relay.

If a failure is detected by the automatic supervision function or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.

Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during a regular test, confirm the following first: - Test circuit connections are correct. - Correct power voltage is applied. - Correct AC inputs are applied. - Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.

6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit If the failure is identified to be in the relay and the user has a spare relay, the user can recover the protection by replacing the relay.

Repairs at site should be limited to relay replacement. Maintenance at component level is not recommended.

Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software type form) as the relay to be replaced.

The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.

Replacing the relay unit

CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.

The procedure for relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

• Switch off the DC power supply.

Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit when the power supply is de-energized. It will take approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

• Remove the terminal blocks from the relay leaving the wiring in place. • To remove the relay unit from the panel, the attachment screws must be removed. • Insert the (spare) relay unit following the reverse procedure.

CAUTION To avoid risk of damage: • When the attachment kits are removed, support the relay to ensure that it does not fall from

panel. • Ensure that the relay front cover panel is closed throughout the operation.

6.7.4 Resumption of Service After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following procedures to restore the relay to the service.

• Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the "ALARM" red LED is not lit.

• Connect the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.

6.7.5 Storage The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C is recommended for long-term storage.

WARNING

129

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

7. Putting Relay into Service The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the commissioning tests or maintenance tests.

• Check that all the external connections are correct.

• Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are correct.

In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.

• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are recorded during the tests.

• Press key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.

• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.

130

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix A

Signal List

131

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 0 Not in use 1 BI1 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI1 2 BI2 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI2 3 BI3 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI3 4 BI4 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI4 5 BI5 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI5 6 BI6 COMAND Binary Input signal of BI6 7 Not in use 8 Not in use 9 CONSTANT_0 Constant 0 10 CONSTANT_1 Constant 1 11 SET. GROUP1 BI command of change active setting group1 12 SET. GROUP2 BI command of change active setting group2 13 Not in use 14 Not in use 15 OV1 BLOCK BI command of OV1 protection scheme block 16 OV2 BLOCK BI command of OV2 protection scheme block 17 OV3 BLOCK BI command of OV3 protection scheme block 18 UV1 BLOCK BI command of UV1 protection scheme block 19 UV2 BLOCK BI command of UV2 protection scheme block 20 UV3 BLOCK BI command of UV3 protection scheme block 21 ZPS1 BLOCK BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block 22 ZPS2 BLOCK BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block 23 NPS1 BLOCK BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block 24 NPS2 BLOCK BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block 25 TC FAIL BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm 26 CB CONT OPN BI command of CB N/O contact 27 CB CONT CLS BI command of CB N/C contact 28 EXT TRIP-3PH BI command of External trip (3 Phase) 29 EXT TRIP-APH BI command of External trip (A Phase) 30 EXT TRIP-BPH BI command of External trip (B Phase) 31 EXT TRIP-CPH BI command of External trip (C Phase) 32 REMOTE RESET BI command of Remote reset 33 SYNC CLOCK BI command of Synchronize Clock 34 STORE RECORD BI command of Store Disturbance Record 35 ALARM1 BI command of Alarm1 36 ALARM2 BI command of Alarm2 37 ALARM3 BI command of Alarm3 38 ALARM4 BI command of Alarm4 39 Not in use 40 Not in use

132

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 41 Not in use 42 FRQ1 BLOCK BI command of FRQ1 protection scheme block 43 FRQ2 BLOCK BI command of FRQ2 protection scheme block 44 FRQ3 BLOCK BI command of FRQ3 protection scheme block 45 FRQ4 BLOCK BI command of FRQ4 protection scheme block 46 Not in use 47 Not in use 48 Not in use 49 Not in use 50 OV1_INST-OR OV1 element start at IDMT setting. 51 OV1-A INST OV1-A relay element start at IDMT setting. 52 OV1-B INST OV1-B relay element start at IDMT setting. 53 OV1-C INST OV1-C relay element start at IDMT setting. 54 Not in use 55 Not in use 56 OV2_INST-OR OV2 element start at IDMT setting.. 57 OV2-A INST OV2-A relay element start at IDMT setting. 58 OV2-B INST OV2-B relay element start at IDMT setting. 59 OV2-C INST OV2-C relay element start at IDMT setting. 60 Not in use 61 Not in use 62 Not in use 63 OV1-A OV1-A relay element output 64 OV1-B OV1-B relay element output 65 OV1-C OV1-C relay element output 66 OV2-A OV2-A relay element output 67 OV2-B OV2-B relay element output 68 OV2-C OV2-C relay element output 69 OV3-A OV3-A relay element output 70 OV3-B OV3-B relay element output 71 OV3-C OV3-C relay element output 72 UV1-A UV1-A relay element output 73 UV1-B UV1-B relay element output 74 UV1-C UV1-C relay element output 75 UV2-A UV2-A relay element output 76 UV2-B UV2-B relay element output 77 UV2-C UV2-C relay element output 78 UV3-A UV3-A relay element output 79 UV3-B UV3-B relay element output 80 UV3-C UV3-C relay element output 81 OV1-OR OV1 element start at DT settings. 82 OV1-A pick up OV1-A relay element start at DT settings. 83 OV1-B pick up OV1-B relay element start at DT settings. 84 OV1-C pick up OV1-C relay element start at DT settings.

133

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 85 OV2-OR OV2 element start at DT settings. 86 OV2-A pick up OV2-A relay element start at DT settings. 87 OV2-B pick up OV2-B relay element start at DT settings. 88 OV2-C pick up OV2-C relay element start at DT settings. 89 OV3-OR OV3 element start at DT settings. 90 Not in use 91 Not in use 92 Not in use 93 ZPS1 ZPS1 relay element output 94 ZPS2 ZPS2 relay element output 95 NPS1 NPS1 relay element output 96 NPS2 NPS2 relay element output 97 UVBLK UV protection scheme block 98 Not in use 99 Not in use 100 Not in use 101 OV1 TRIP OV1 trip command 102 OV1-A TRIP OV1 trip command (A Phase) 103 OV1-B TRIP OV1 trip command (B Phase) 104 OV1-C TRIP OV1 trip command (C Phase) 105 Not in use 106 Not in use 107 Not in use 108 OV2 TRIP OV2 trip command 109 OV2-A TRIP OV2 trip command (A Phase) 110 OV2-B TRIP OV2 trip command (B Phase) 111 OV2-C TRIP OV2 trip command (C Phase) 112 Not in use 113 Not in use 114 Not in use 115 OV3 TRIP OV3 trip command 116 OV3-A TRIP OV3 trip command (A Phase) 117 OV3-B TRIP OV3 trip command (B Phase) 118 OV3-C TRIP OV3 trip command (C Phase) 119 Not in use 120 Not in use 121 FV BLOCK FRQ protection scheme block by UV element 122 UV1 TRIP UV1 trip command 123 UV1-A TRIP UV1 trip command (A Phase) 124 UV1-B TRIP UV1 trip command (B Phase) 125 UV1-C TRIP UV1 trip command (C Phase) 126 UV2 TRIP UV2 trip command 127 UV2-A TRIP UV2 trip command (A Phase) 128 UV2-B TRIP UV2 trip command (B Phase) 129 UV2-C TRIP UV2 trip command (C Phase)

134

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 130 UV3 TRIP UV3 trip command 131 UV3-A TRIP UV3 trip command (A Phase) 132 UV3-B TRIP UV3 trip command (B Phase) 133 UV3-C TRIP UV3 trip command (C Phase) 134 ZPS1 TRIP ZPS1 trip command 135 ZPS2 ALARM ZPS2 alarm command 136 NPS1 TRIP NPS1 trip command 137 NPS2 ALARM NPS2 alarm command 138 Not in use 139 Not in use 140 Not in use 141 GEN.TRIP General Trip command 142 GEN.TRIP-A General Trip command (A Phase) 143 GEN.TRIP-B General Trip command (B Phase) 144 GEN.TRIP-C General Trip command (C Phase) 145 Not in use 146 Not in use 147 Not in use 148 Not in use 149 Not in use 150 GEN.ALARM General alarm command 151 ZPS1 pick-up ZPS1 element start at DT setting. 152 ZPS2 pick-up ZPS2 element start at DT setting. 153 NPS1 pick-up NPS1 element start at DT setting. 154 NPS2 pick-up NPS2 element start at DT setting. 155 UV1 INST-OR UV1 relay element start at IDMT setting 156 UV2 INST-OR UV2 relay element start at IDMT setting 157 UV1-A INST UV1-A relay element start at IDMT setting 158 UV1-B INST UV1-B relay element start at IDMT setting 159 UV1-C INST UV1-C relay element start at IDMT setting 160 A.M.F.OFF Automatic monitoring function off 161 RELAY FAIL Relay failure & trip blocked alarm 162 RELAY FAIL-A Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked) 163 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure 164 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure 165 TC ALARM Trip counter alarm 166 Not in use 167 Not in use 168 V0 ERR V0 error 169 V2 ERR V2 error 170 BO1OP Binary Output1 operated 171 BO2OP Binary Output2 operated 172 BO3OP Binary Output3 operated 173 BO4OP Binary Output4 operated

135

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 174 Not in use 175 Not in use 176 Not in use 177 UV2-A INST UV2-A relay element start at IDMT setting. 178 UV2-B INST UV2-B relay element start at IDMT setting. 179 UV2-C INST UV2-C relay element start at IDMT setting. 180 Not in use 181 LCD IND. LCD indication (Virtual LED) command 182 LCD IND1. LCD indication1 (Virtual LED) command 183 LCD IND2. LCD indication2 (Virtual LED) command 184 Not in use 185 Not in use 186 TESTING Testing LED lit output 187 Not in use 188 Not in use 189 Not in use 190 GEN PICKUP General start / pick-up output 191 NORM LED ON In service LED ON 192 TRIP LED ON TRIP LED ON 193 PROT COM ON IEC60870-5-103 protection command 194 IECTST IEC60870-5-103 communication test 195 IECBLK IEC60870-5-103 communication block 196 Not in use 197 ZPS1 INST ZPS1 relay element start at IDMT setting 198 ZPS2 INST ZPS2 relay element start at IDMT setting 199 NPS1 INST NPS1 relay element start at IDMT setting 200 NPS2 INST NPS2 relay element start at IDMT setting 201 BI1 COMMAND1 Binary Input signal of BI1 after BI1SNS 202 BI2 COMMAND1 Binary Input signal of BI2 after BI2SNS 203 BI3 COMMAND1 Binary Input signal of BI3 after BI3SNS 204 BI4 COMMAND1 Binary Input signal of BI4 after BI4SNS 205 BI5 COMMAND1 Binary Input signal of BI5 after BI5SNS 206 BI6 COMMAND1 Binary Input signal of BI6 after BI6SNS 207 BO5OP Binary Output5 operated 208 BO6OP Binary Output6 operated 209 BO7OP Binary Output7 operated 210 BO8OP Binary Output8 operated 211 F11 FRQ1 relay F11 element output 212 F12 FRQ1 relay F12 element output 213 DF-R1 DFRQ1 relay rise element output 214 DF-D1 DFRQ1 relay decay element output 215 F21 FRQ2 relay F21 element output 216 F22 FRQ2 relay F22 element output 217 DF-R2 DFRQ2 relay rise element output

136

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 218 DF-D2 DFRQ2 relay decay element output 219 F31 FRQ3 relay F31 element output 220 F32 FRQ3 relay F32 element output 221 DF-R3 DFRQ3 relay rise element output 222 DR-D3 DFRQ3 relay decay element output 223 F41 FRQ4 relay F41 element output 224 F42 FRQ4 relay F42 element output 225 DF-R4 DFRQ4 relay rise element output 226 DF-D4 DFRQ4 relay decay element output 227 Not in use 228 Not in use 229 Not in use 230 Not in use 231 F11 TRIP FRQ1 relay F11 Trip command 232 F12 TRIP FRQ1 relay F12 Trip command 233 DF-R1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay rise Trip command 234 DF-D1 TRIP DFRQ1 relay decay Trip command 235 FRQ1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command 236 F21 TRIP FRQ2 relay F21 Trip command 237 F22 TRIP FRQ2 relay F22 Trip command 238 DF-R2 TRIP DFRQ2 relay rise Trip command 239 DF-D2 TRIP DFRQ2 relay decay Trip command 240 FRQ2 TRIP FRQ2 relay Trip command 241 F31 TRIP FRQ3 relay F31 Trip command 242 F32 TRIP FRQ3 relay F32 Trip command 243 DF-R3 TRIP DFRQ3 relay rise Trip command 244 DF-D3 TRIP DFRQ3 relay decay Trip command 245 FRQ3 TRIP FRQ3 relay Trip command 246 F41 TRIP FRQ4 relay F41 Trip command 247 F42 TRIP FRQ4 relay F42 Trip command 248 DF-R4 TRIP DFRQ4 relay rise Trip command 249 DF-D4 TRIP DFRQ4 relay decay Trip command 250 FRQ4 TRIP FRQ4 relay Trip command 251 FRQ STAGE1 TRIP FRQ1 relay Trip command 252 FRQ STAGE2 TRIP FRQ2 relay Trip command 253 FRQ STAGE3 TRIP FRQ3 relay Trip command 254 FRQ STAGE4 TRIP FRQ4 relay Trip command 255 UV1-OR UV1 element start at DT settings. 256 UV1-A pick up UV1-A relay element start at DT settings. 257 UV1-B pick up UV1-B relay element start at DT settings. 258 UV1-C pick up UV1-C relay element start at DT settings. 259 UV2-OR UV2 element start at DT settings. 260 UV2-A pick up UV2-A relay element start at DT settings. 261 UV2-B pick up UV2-B relay element start at DT settings. 262 UV2-C pick up UV2-C relay element start at DT settings.

137

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 263 UV3-OR UV3 element start at DT settings. 264 UV3-A pick up UV3-A relay element start at DT settings. 265 UV3-B pick up UV3-B relay element start at DT settings. 266 UV3-C pick up UV3-C relay element start at DT settings. 267 Not in use 268 Not in use 269 Not in use 270 LOCAL Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Local state 271 REMOTE Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Remote state 272 CB_OPN_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker open 273 CB_CLS_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker close 274 CB_OPN_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker open 275 CB_CLS_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker close 276 CB_OPN_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker open 277 CB_CLC_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker close 278 LOCK_BI BI command of Interlock 279 LOCK_COMM Communication command of Interlock 280 CB OPOUT Circuit Breaker Open output 281 CB CLOUT Circuit Breaker Close output 282 Not in use 283 Not in use 284 OV1I-A OV1-A integrated value holding at IDMT setting 285 OV1I-B OV1-B integrated value holding at IDMT setting 286 OV1I-C OV1-C integrated value holding at IDMT setting 287 OV2I-A OV2-A integrated value holding at IDMT setting 288 OV2I-B OV2-B integrated value holding at IDMT setting 289 OV2I-C OV2-C integrated value holding at IDMT setting 290 ZPS1I-A ZPS1 integrated value holding at IDMT setting 291 NPS1I-B NPS1 integrated value holding at IDMT setting 292 ZPS2I-C ZPS2 integrated value holding at IDMT setting 293 NPS2I-A NPS2 integrated value holding at IDMT setting 294 UV1I-A UV1-A integrated value holding at IDMT setting 295 UV1I-B UV1-B integrated value holding at IDMT setting 296 UV1I-C UV1-C integrated value holding at IDMT setting 297 UV2I-A UV2-A integrated value holding at IDMT setting 298 UV2I-B UV2-B integrated value holding at IDMT setting 299 UV2I-C UV2-C integrated value holding at IDMT setting 300 Not in use 301 ETH1_LINKUP Ether port 1 LINK-UP 302 ETH2_LINKUP Ether port 2 LINK-UP 303 IEC61850 RUN IEC61850 RUN 304 GOOSE IN Q1 Goose quality#1 305 GOOSE IN Q2 Goose quality#2 306 GOOSE IN Q3 Goose quality#3 307 GOOSE IN Q4 Goose quality#4

138

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. SIGNAL Name Contents 308 GOOSE IN Q5 Goose quality#5 309 GOOSE IN Q6 Goose quality#6 310 GOOSE IN Q7 Goose quality#7 311 GOOSE IN Q8 Goose quality#8 312 GOOSE IN Q9 Goose quality#9 313 GOOSE IN Q10 Goose quality#10 314 GOOSE IN Q11 Goose quality#11 315 GOOSE IN Q12 Goose quality#12 316 GOOSE IN Q13 Goose quality#13 317 GOOSE IN Q14 Goose quality#14 318 GOOSE IN Q15 Goose quality#15 319 GOOSE IN Q16 Goose quality#16 320 GOOSE IN 1 Goose data#1 321 GOOSE IN 2 Goose data#2 322 GOOSE IN 3 Goose data#3 323 GOOSE IN 4 Goose data#4 324 GOOSE IN 5 Goose data#5 325 GOOSE IN 6 Goose data#6 326 GOOSE IN 7 Goose data#7 327 GOOSE IN 8 Goose data#8 328 GOOSE IN 9 Goose data#9 329 GOOSE IN 10 Goose data#10 330 GOOSE IN 11 Goose data#11 331 GOOSE IN 12 Goose data#12 332 GOOSE IN 13 Goose data#13 333 GOOSE IN 14 Goose data#14 334 GOOSE IN 15 Goose data#15 335 GOOSE IN 16 Goose data#16 350 TEMP001 Temporally output signal 351 TEMP002 Temporally output signal 352 TEMP003 Temporally output signal 353 TEMP004 Temporally output signal 354 TEMP005 Temporally output signal 355 TEMP006 Temporally output signal 356 TEMP007 Temporally output signal 357 TEMP008 Temporally output signal 358 TEMP009 Temporally output signal 359 TEMP0010 Temporally output signal 360 TEMP0011 Temporally output signal 361 TEMP0012 Temporally output signal

139

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix B

Event Record Items

140

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ID. LCD indication Contents 1 GEN.trip Off / On General trip command 2 GEN.trip-A Off / On General trip command (A Phase) 3 GEN.trip-B Off / On General trip command (B Phase) 4 GEN.trip-C Off / On General trip command (C Phase) 5 GEN.trip-AB Off / On General trip command (A-B Phase) 6 GEN.trip-BC Off / On General trip command (B-C Phase) 7 GEN.trip-CA Off / On General trip command (C-A Phase) 8 OV1-A trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A Phase) 9 OV1-B trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B Phase) 10 OV1-C trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C Phase) 11 OV2-A trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A Phase) 12 OV2-B trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B Phase) 13 OV2-C trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C Phase) 14 OV3-A alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A Phase) 15 OV3-B alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B Phase) 16 OV3-C alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C Phase) 17 UV1-A trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A Phase) 18 UV1-B trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B Phase) 19 UV1-C trip Off / On UV1 trip command (C Phase) 20 UV2-A trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A Phase) 21 UV2-B trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B Phase) 22 UV2-C trip Off / On UV2 trip command (C Phase) 23 UV3-A alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A Phase) 24 UV3-B alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B Phase) 25 UV3-C alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C Phase) 26 OV1-AB trip Off / On OV1 trip command (A-B Phase) 27 OV1-BC trip Off / On OV1 trip command (B-C Phase) 28 OV1-CA trip Off / On OV1 trip command (C-A Phase) 29 OV2-AB trip Off / On OV2 trip command (A-B Phase) 30 OV2-BC trip Off / On OV2 trip command (B-C Phase) 31 OV2-CA trip Off / On OV2 trip command (C-A Phase) 32 OV3-AB alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (A-B Phase) 33 OV3-BC alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (B-C Phase) 34 OV3-CA alarm Off / On OV3 alarm command (C-A Phase) 35 UV1-AB trip Off / On UV1 trip command (A-B Phase) 36 UV1-BC trip Off / On UV1 trip command (B-C Phase) 37 UV1-CA trip Off / On UV1 trip command(C-A Phase) 38 UV2-AB trip Off / On UV2 trip command (A-B Phase) 39 UV2-BC trip Off / On UV2 trip command (B-C Phase) 40 UV2-CA trip Off / On UV2 trip command(C-A Phase) 41 UV3-AB alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (A-B Phase) 42 UV3-BC alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (B-C Phase)

141

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. LCD indication Contents 43 UV3-CA alarm Off / On UV3 alarm command (C-A Phase) 44 OV1 trip Off / On OV1 trip command 45 OV2 trip Off / On OV2 trip command 46 OV3 trip Off / On OV3 trip command 47 UV1 trip Off / On UV1 trip command 48 UV2 trip Off / On UV2 trip command 49 UV3 trip Off / On UV3 trip command 50 ZPS1 trip Off / On ZPS1 trip command 51 ZPS2 alarm Off / On ZPS2 alarm command 52 NPS1 trip Off / On NPS1 trip command 53 NPS2 alarm Off / On NPS2 alarm command 54 OV1-A Off / On OV1-A relay element operating 55 OV1-B Off / On OV1-B relay element operating 56 OV1-C Off / On OV1-C relay element operating 57 OV2-A Off / On OV2-A relay element operating 58 OV2-B Off / On OV2-B relay element operating 59 OV2-C Off / On OV2-C relay element operating 60 OV3-A Off / On OV3-A relay element operating 61 OV3-B Off / On OV3-B relay element operating 62 OV3-C Off / On OV3-C relay element operating 63 UV1-A Off / On UV1-A relay element operating 64 UV1-B Off / On UV1-B relay element operating 65 UV1-C Off / On UV1-C relay element operating 66 UV2-A Off / On UV2-A relay element operating 67 UV2-B Off / On UV2-B relay element operating 68 UV2-C Off / On UV2-C relay element operating 69 UV3-A Off / On UV3-A relay element operating 70 UV3-B Off / On UV3-B relay element operating 71 UV3-C Off / On UV3-C relay element operating 72 OV1-AB Off / On OV1-AB relay element operating 73 OV1-BC Off / On OV1-BC relay element operating 74 OV1-CA Off / On OV1-CA relay element operating 75 OV2-AB Off / On OV2-AB relay element operating 76 OV2-BC Off / On OV2-BC relay element operating 77 OV2-CA Off / On OV2-CA relay element operating 78 OV3-AB Off / On OV3-AB relay element operating 79 OV3-BC Off / On OV3-BC relay element operating 80 OV3-CA Off / On OV3-CA relay element operating 81 UV1-AB Off / On UV1-AB relay element operating 82 UV1-BC Off / On UV1-BC relay element operating 83 UV1-CA Off / On UV1-CA relay element operating 84 UV2-AB Off / On UV2-AB relay element operating 85 UV2-BC Off / On UV2-BC relay element operating 86 UV2-CA Off / On UV2-CA relay element operating 87 UV3-AB Off / On UV3-AB relay element operating 88 UV3-BC Off / On UV3-BC relay element operating

142

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. LCD indication Contents 89 UV3-CA Off / On UV3-CA relay element operating 90 OV1 Off / On OV1 relay element operating 91 OV2 Off / On OV2 relay element operating 92 OV3 Off / On OV3 relay element operating 93 UV1 Off / On UV1 relay element operating 94 UV2 Off / On UV2 relay element operating 95 UV3 Off / On UV3 relay element operating 96 ZPS1 Off / On ZPS1 relay element operating 97 ZPS2 Off / On ZPS2 relay element operating 98 NPS1 Off / On NPS1 relay element operating 99 NPS2 Off / On NPS2 relay element operating 100 UVBLK Off / On UVBLK element operating 101 BI1 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI1 102 BI2 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI2 103 BI3 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI3 104 BI4 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI4 105 BI5 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI5 106 BI6 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI6 107 SET. group1 Off / On BI command of change active setting group1 108 SET. group2 Off / On BI command of change active setting group2 109 OV1 block Off / On BI command of OV1 protection scheme block 110 OV2 block Off / On BI command of OV2 protection scheme block 111 OV3 block Off / On BI command of OV3 protection scheme block 112 UV1 block Off / On BI command of UV1 protection scheme block 113 UV2 block Off / On BI command of UV2 protection scheme block 114 UV3 block Off / On BI command of UV3 protection scheme block 115 ZPS1 block Off / On BI command of ZPS1 protection scheme block 116 ZPS2 block Off / On BI command of ZPS2 protection scheme block 117 NPS1 block Off / On BI command of NPS1 protection scheme block 118 NPS2 block Off / On BI command of NPS2 protection scheme block 119 TC fail Off / On BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm 120 CB CONT OPN Off / On BI command of CB N/O contact 121 CB CONT CLS Off / On BI command of CB N/C contact 122 EXT trip-3PH Off / On BI command of External trip (3 Phase) 123 EXT trip-APH Off / On BI command of External trip (A Phase) 124 EXT trip-BPH Off / On BI command of External trip (B Phase) 125 EXT trip-CPH Off / On BI command of External trip (C Phase) 126 Remote reset Off / On BI command of Remote reset 127 SYNC Off / On 128 Store record Off / On BI command of Store Disturbance Record 129 Alarm1 Off / On BI command of Alarm1 130 Alarm2 Off / On BI command of Alarm2 131 Alarm3 Off / On BI command of Alarm3 132 Alarm4 Off / On BI command of Alarm4 133 Relay fail Off / On Relay failure & trip blocked alarm

143

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. LCD indication Contents No. 134 Relay fail-A Off / On Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked) 135 TC err Off / On Trip circuit supervision failure 136 CB err Off / On Circuit Breaker failure 137 V0 err Off / On Zero phase input circuit failure 138 V2 err Off / On VT circuit supervision failure 139 TP COUNT ALM Off / On Trip counter alarm 140 F.record CLR On Clear Fault records 141 E.record CLR On Clear Event records 142 D.record CLR On Clear Disturbance records 143 TP COUNT On Clear Trip counter 144 IND.reset On Reset indication for Trip mode, Alarm etc.

145 Data lost On Record and time for data lost with power supply de-energized for an extended period

146 Sys.Set Change On System setting change command 147 Rly.Set Change On Relay setting change command 148 Grp.Set Change On Group setting change command 149 OV1-A INST Off / On OV1-A relay element start 150 OV1-B INST Off / On OV1-B relay element start 151 OV1-C INST Off / On OV1-C relay element start 152 OV2-A INST Off / On OV2-A relay element start 153 OV2-B INST Off / On OV2-B relay element start 154 OV2-C INST Off / On OV2-C relay element start 155 UV1-A INST Off / On UV1-A relay element start 156 UV1-B INST Off / On UV1-B relay element start 157 UV1-C INST Off / On UV1-C relay element start 158 UV2-A INST Off / On UV2-A relay element start 159 UV2-B INST Off / On UV2-B relay element start 160 UV2-C INST Off / On UV2-C relay element start 161 OV1-AB INST Off / On OV1-AB relay element start 162 OV1-BC INST Off / On OV1-BC relay element start 163 OV1-CA INST Off / On OV1-CA relay element start 164 OV2-AB INST Off / On OV2-AB relay element start 165 OV2-BC INST Off / On OV2-BC relay element start 166 OV2-CA INST Off / On OV2-CA relay element start 167 UV1-AB INST Off / On UV1-AB relay element start 168 UV1-BC INST Off / On UV1-BC relay element start 169 UV1-CA INST Off / On UV1-CA relay element start 170 UV2-AB INST Off / On UV2-AB relay element start 171 UV2-BC INST Off / On UV2-BC relay element start 172 UV2-CA INST Off / On UV2-CA relay element start 173 OV1 INST Off / On OV1 relay element start 174 OV2 INST Off / On OV2 relay element start 175 UV1 INST Off / On UV1 relay element start 176 UV2 INST Off / On UV2 relay element start 177 ZPS1 INST Off / On ZPS1 relay element start 178 ZPS2 INST Off / On ZPS2 relay element start

144

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

No. LCD indication Contents No. 179 NPS1 INST Off / On NPS1 relay element start 180 NPS2 INST Off / On NPS2 relay element start 181 FREQ1 trip Off / On FREQ1 relay element operating 182 FREQ2 trip Off / On FREQ2 relay element operating 183 FREQ3 trip Off / On FREQ3 relay element operating 184 FREQ4 trip Off / On FREQ4 relay element operating 185 FREQ1 block Off / On BI command of FREQ1 protection scheme block 186 FREQ2 block Off / On BI command of FREQ2 protection scheme block 187 FREQ3 block Off / On BI command of FREQ3 protection scheme block 188 FREQ4 block Off / On BI command of FREQ4 protection scheme block 189 Local Off / On CB Control hierarchy Local state 190 Remote Off / On CB Control hierarchy Remote state 191 CB OPC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Open 192 CB CLC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Close 193 CB OPC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Open 194 CB CLC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Close 195 CB OPC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Open 196 CB CLC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Close 197 LOCK_BI Off / On BI command of Interlock 198 LOCK_COMM Off / On Communication command of Interlock 199 CB OPOUT Off / On CB Open Output 200 CB CLOUT Off / On CB Close Output 201 V0 ALM Off / On Zero phase input circuit alarm 202 V2 ALM Off / On VT circuit supervision alarm 203 BO1 operate Off / On Binary output1 operating 204 BO2 operate Off / On Binary output2 operating 205 BO3 operate Off / On Binary output3 operating 206 BO4 operate Off / On Binary output4 operating 207 BO5 operate Off / On Binary output5 operating 208 BO6 operate Off / On Binary output6 operating 209 BO7 operate Off / On Binary output7 operating 210 BO8 operate Off / On Binary output8 operating 211 GEN.pick-up Off / On General start / pick-up command

145

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix C

Binary Output Default Setting List

146

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Relay Model

BO No.

Terminal No.

Signal Name

Contents Setting

Signal No.

Logic (OR:0, AND:1)

Reset (Inst:0, Del:1

Latch:2) GRE130

-410

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R.F.

TB2: 1 - 2 3 – 4 5 - 6 7 - 8 9 - 10

NON GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON Relay fail

Off (Link to CB Close SW) Relay trip (General) (Link to CB Open SW) Relay alarm (General) Off

0

141

150 0

0 0 0 0

1 1

1 1

GRE130

-411

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R.F.

TB2: 1 - 2 3 – 4 5 - 6 7 - 8 9 - 10

NON GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON Relay fail


0

141

150 0

0 0 0 0

1 1

1 1

GRE130

-412

BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 R.F. BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8

TB3: 1 - 2 3 – 4 5 - 6 7 - 8 9 – 10

TB1 1 - 2 3 - 4 5 - 6 7 - 8

NON GENERAL TRIP GENERAL ALARM NON Relay fail NON NON NON NON


Off Off Off Off

0

141

150 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1

1 1

1 1 1 1

147

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix D

Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation

148

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1

MAIN MENU Record Status Set. (view) Set. (change) Control Test

Clear records? END=Y CANCEL=N

/4 Fault #1 16/Jul/2010



/2 Fault View record Clear

/3 Fault #1 16/Jul/2010 18:13:57.031

/3 Disturbance #1 16/Jul/2010 18:13:57.401

/2 Event View record Clear

/3 Event 16/Jul/2010 Ext. trip A On

/2 Disturbance View record Clear

Refer to Section 4.2.3.1.



/1 Record Fault Event Disturbance Counter

149

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Clear Trips? END=Y CANCEL=N

/3 Counter Trips ***** TripsA ***** TripsB ***** TripsC *****

/2 Counter View counter Clear Trips Clear Trips A Clear Trips B Clear Trips C

Clear Trips A? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear Trips B? END=Y CANCEL=N

Clear Trips C? END=Y CANCEL=N

150

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1, b-1

a-1

/2 Metering Va **.** kV

/2 16/Jul/2010 22:56:19 [L]

/2 Binary I/O IP [0000 00 ]

/2 Ry element AN OV1-4[0000 ]

/2 Time sync. *BI: Act.

/2 LCD contrast

/1 Status Metering Binary I/O Relay element Time sync. Clock adjust. LCD contrast

/1 Set. (view) Version Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED Control Frequency

Refer to Section 4.2.4.

/2 Version Relay type Software

/2 Description Plant name Description

Refer to Section 4.2.5

Software GS1EM1-03-* PLC data

/2 Comms Addr. Switch

GRE130-411A-10 -10

/3 Addr. Addr. *

/3 Switch

151

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

/3 Event BI1 comm. 3 N/O/R/B :

/4 Time/starter Time1 2.0s

/4 Scheme sw

/2 Record Event Disturbance Counter

/3 Disturbance Time/Starter Scheme sw Binary sig.

/3 Group1 Parameter Trip

/2 Status Metering Time sync. Time zone /3 Time sync.

/3 Metering

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗∗ /5 VT ratio VTS 100

/4 Parameter Line name VT ratio

/4 Scheme sw

/4 Alarm set TCALM 10000

/3 Counter Scheme sw Alarm set

/4 Binary sig. SIG1 51

/3 Common APPL

/2 Act. gp. =* Common Group1 Group2

/3 Time zone.

152

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1 b-1

a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1

Alarm∗ Text

/3 Group2 Parameter

/6 OV prot.

/4 Trip Scheme sw Prot.element

/5 Scheme sw Application OV prot. UV prot. ZPS prot. NPS prot. FRQ prot.

/5 Prot.element OV prot. UV prot. ZPS prot. NPS prot. FRQ prot.

/6 UV prot.

/6 ZPS prot.

/6 FRQ prot.

/6 OV prot. OV1 10.0V

/6 UV prot. UV1 10.0V

/6 ZPS prot. ZPS1 10.0V

/6 FRQ prot. FRQ1 10.0Hz

/2 Binary I/P BI STATUS BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Alarm1 Text Alarm2 Text Alarm3 Text Alarm4 Text

/3 BI1 Timers Functions


∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

/4 Timers BI1PUD 0.00s

/4 Functions

/6 Application

/3 BI STATUS

/6 NPS prot.

/6 NPS prot. NPS1 10.0V

153

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6


Set.(change) Input [_ ] 1234567890←

Set.(change) Retype [_ ] 1234567890←

: Confirmation trap

: Password trap

Set.(change) Password [_ ] 1234567890←

Change settings? ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

_ ABCDEFG

_ ABCDEFG

/2 Description Plant name Description


/3 LED

/2 Binary O/P BO1 AND, DL 0, 0, 0, 0 BO4 OR , Lat 141, 1, 2, 3


a-1 b-1

a-1 b-2

/2 Comms Addr. Switch

/3 Addr. Addr

/3 Switch RS485

/1 Set.(change) Password Description Comms Record Status Protection Binary I/P Binary O/P LED Control Frequency

/2 LED LED Virtual LED

/3 Virtual LED IND1 IND2

/4 IND1 BIT1 I,O

/4 IND2 BIT1 I,O

/2 Control

/2 Frequency

154

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

a-1 b-2

/4 Time/starter

/4 Scheme sw

/2 Record Event Disturbance Counter

/3 Disturbance Time/starter Scheme sw Binary sig.

/3 Metering Display

/3 Time sync. Time sync.

/2 Status Metering Time sync. Time zone

/2 Protection Change act. gp. Change set. Copy gp.

/3 Change act. gp.

/3 Act gp.=1 Common Group1 Group2




/4 Scheme sw /4 Alarm set

/3 Counter Scheme sw Alarm set

/4 Binary sig.

/3 Event BI1 comm. BI1 comm. 3 _ N/O/R/B : :

/4 Common APPL

/3 Time zone GMT _

155

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6 a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2

_ ABCDEFG

/4 Group1 Parameter Trip

/5 Parameter Line name VT ratio

/4 Group2 Parameter

/6 VT ratio VTS

/5 Trip Scheme sw Prot.element

/7 OV prot.

/6 Scheme sw Application OV prot. UV prot. ZPS prot. NPS prot. FRQ prot.

/6 Prot.element OV prot. UV prot. ZPS prot. NPS prot. FRQ prot.

/7 UV prot.

/7 ZPS prot.

/7 FRQ prot.

/7 OV prot.

/7 UV prot.

/7 ZPS prot.

/7 FRQ prot.

/7 Application

a-1, b-2 c-2

/7 NPS prot.

/7 NPS prot.

156

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

/3 Copy A to B A _ B _


/4 Logic/Reset

/4 Functions

/3 BO1 Logic/Reset Functions

/2 Binary O/P BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 /3 BO4

Logic/Reset Functions



/2 Binary I/P BI Status BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Alarm1 Text Alarm2 Text Alarm3 Text Alarm4 Text



∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ABCDEFG

/4 Timers

/4 Functions

Alarm∗ Text

a-1 b-2 c-2

a-1 b-2 c-3

/5 Logic/Reset

/5 Functions

/4 LED1 Logic/Reset Functions LED Color

/3 LED LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 CB CLOSED

/4 LED6 Logic/Reset Functions LED Color

/2 LED LED Virtual LED

/5 LED Color

/4 CB CLOSED LED Color

/5 LED Color

/3 BI Status BITHR1

157

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Operate? ENTER=Y CANCEL=N

/1 Test Password(Test) Switch Binary O/P

/2 Switch A.M.F. 1 _ Off/On UVTST 0 Off/S0/S3

/2 Binary O/P BO1 0 _ Disable/Enable BO4 0 Disable/Enable

Refer to Section 4.2.8.

a-1 b-2 c-3

/3 Virtual LED IND1 IND2

/5 Reset

/5 Functions

/4 IND1 Reset Functions

/4 IND2 Reset Functions

Control Input [_ ] 1234567890←

Control Retype [_ ] 1234567890←


/1 Control Password(Ctrl) Local/Remote CB OPEN/CLOSE Refer to Section 4.2.7

: Password trap

Control Password [_ ] 1234567890←

Test Input [_ ] 1234567890←

Test Retype [_ ] 1234567890←

Refer to Section 4.2.8.2. : Password trap

Test Password [_ ] 1234567890←

/2 Control

/2 Frequency

158

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix E

Case Outline

159

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Case Outline

160

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Case Outline for model 412

161

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix F

Typical External Connection

162

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vph

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

BI1

BI2

RS485

N.C.

GRE130-410AAPPL ； 1PP

N.C.

Threshold33.6/77/154V


A+B-

COM

Relay fail indicator

AUXILIARYAvailable for

TCS(CB CLOSED)


TCS(CB OPEN)

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFF

OUTPUT CONACTSSIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 1PP setting

163

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vph

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

BI1

BI2

RS485

N.C.

GRE130-411AAPPL ； 1PN

N.C.



A+B-

COM


AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

*

*



DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

Threshold77/154V

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N

(CB CLOSED)

(CB OPEN)


Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 411A 1PN setting

164

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vab

Vbc

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

BI1

BI2

RS485

N.C.

GRE130-410AAPPL ； 2PP 2PZ

N.C.



A+B-

COM


FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*



DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N


TCS(CB CLOSED)


TCS(CB OPEN)


Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 2PP ( 2PZ ) setting

165

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Va

Vb

Vc

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

BI1

BI2

RS485

N.C.

GRE130-411AAPPL ； 3PN 　　　　3PV

N.C.



A+B-

COM


AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

*

*



DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

Threshold77/154V

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

(CB CLOSED)

(CB OPEN)

P

N

N

N


Typical External Connections for the GRE130 - 410A 3PN ( 3PV ) setting

166

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vab

Vbc

Vca

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB1

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

BO5

TB2

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

BI1

BI2

RS485

N.C.


N.C.



A+B-

COM



TCS(CB CLOSED)


TCS(CB OPEN)

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

Rear PANEL

RJ45 N.C.

N.C.

*

*



DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

P

N

N

N



167

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ABC

CLOSECOIL

Vab

Vbc

Vca

Ve

CB CLOSE SW

Relay fail

TB2

1234567891011121314

CB OPEN SW

TRIPCOIL

PN

FG

POWERSUPPLY+

-

GND

12

34

56

78

9101112

1314

1516

1718192022

212324

BO1

BO2

BO3

BO4

R.F.

TB3

CB CLOSE

CB OPEN/TRIP

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

Control Power

BI1

BI2

RS485

N.C.


N.C.



A+B-

COM


AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

AUXILIARY

Available for TCS

FRONT PANEL

USB Type B

*

*

DEFAULT BI1-2; Off

Controled CB

COMA+B-

COM

A+B-

12

34

56

789101112

BO5

BO6

BO7

BO8

TB1

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

N.C.

*

*

Control Power

Rear PANEL

RJ45

N.C.

Optional Communication Port ***

100BASE-TX　1port / 2port

100BASE-FX　1port / 2port

BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)BO2 GENERAL TRIPBO3 GENERAL ALARMBO4 OFFBO5 OFFBO6 OFFBO7 OFFBO8 OFF


Threshold77/154V

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

AUXILIARY

(CB CLOSED)

(CB OPEN)

P

N

N

N

*BO3, 4, 7 and 8 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.


168

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix G

Relay Setting Sheet 1. Relay Identification

2. Line parameter

3. Contacts setting

4. Relay setting sheet

169

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number Frequency AC voltage Supply voltage Active setting group

Password Setting Control Test

2. Line parameter

VT ratio PVT: RVT:

3. Contacts setting

TB2 BO1

Terminal 1-2

(For model type 412, the terminal block number is TB3 )

BO2 Terminal 3-4 BO3 Terminal 5-6 BO4 Terminal 7-8

BI1 Terminal 13-14 BI2 Terminal 15-16 BI3 Terminal 17-22 BI4 Terminal 18-22 BI5 Terminal 19-22 BI6 Terminal 20-22 TB1 (Only for model type 412) BO5 Terminal 1-2 BO6 Terminal 3-4 BO7 Terminal 5-6 BO8 Terminal 7-8

170

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4. Relay setting sheet Menu Name Range Contents Default

Password

Password(Set) 0000 – 9999 Password for Setting change

None (0000)

Password(Ctrl) 0000 – 9999 Password for Control None (0000)

Password(Test) 0000 – 9999 Password for Test None (0000)

Description Plant name Specified by user Plant name － Description ditto Memorandum for user －

Communi -cation

Modbus 1 - 247 Relay ID No.for Modbus 1 IEC 0 - 254 Relay ID No.for IEC 1 RS485BR 9.6 / 19.2 Baud rate for Modbus 19.2 PORTTYPE RS485-1 Switch for communications RS485-1(0) Ether P Off / IEC61850 Switch for communications Off(0) RS485P Off/MOD/IEC103 Switch for communications MOD(1) IECNFI 1.2 / 2.4 Switch for communications 2.4(1) IECBLK Normal/Blocked Switch for communications Normal(0) IECB1 0 - 361 IEC user specified signal 1 1 IECB2 0 - 361 IEC user specified signal 2 2 IECB3 0 - 361 IEC user specified signal 3 3 IECB4 0 - 361 IEC user specified signal 4 4 IECGT 0 - 8 IEC General Trip 2 IECAT 0 - 8 IEC Trip A phase 2 IECBT 0 - 8 IEC Trip B phase 2 IECCT 0 - 8 IEC Trip C phase 2 IECE1 0 - 361 IEC user event 1 0 IECE2 0 - 361 IEC user event 2 0 IECE3 0 - 361 IEC user event 3 0 IECE4 0 - 361 IEC user event 4 0 IECE5 0 - 361 IEC user event 5 0 IECE6 0 - 361 IEC user event 6 0 IECE7 0 - 361 IEC user event 7 0 IECE8 0 - 361 IEC user event 8 0 IECI1 0 - 255 IEC user INF 1 0 IECI2 0 - 255 IEC user INF 2 0 IECI3 0 - 255 IEC user INF 3 0 IECI4 0 - 255 IEC user INF 4 0 IECI5 0 - 255 IEC user INF 5 0 IECI6 0 - 255 IEC user INF 6 0 IECI7 0 - 255 IEC user INF 7 0 IECI8 0 - 255 IEC user INF 8 0 IECGI1 No / Yes IEC event type setting 1 No(0) IECGI2 No / Yes IEC event type setting 2 No(0) IECGI3 No / Yes IEC event type setting 3 No(0) IECGI4 No / Yes IEC event type setting 4 No(0) IECGI5 No / Yes IEC event type setting 5 No(0) IECGI6 No / Yes IEC event type setting 6 No(0) IECGI7 No / Yes IEC event type setting 7 No(0) IECGI8 No / Yes IEC event type setting 8 No(0)

171

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default Communi -cation

61850BLK Normal / Blocked IEC61850 Block setting Normal(0)

61850AUT Off / On IEC61850 Auto negotiation setting Off(0)

TSTMOD Off / On IEC61850 Test mode Off(0) PINGCHK Off / On Ping check Off(0) IP1-1 0 – 254 IP address 1 of ETH 1 192 IP1-2 0 – 254 IP address 2 of ETH 1 168 IP1-3 0 – 254 IP address 3 of ETH 1 19 IP1-4 0 – 254 IP address 4 of ETH 1 173 SM1-1 0 – 255 Subnet mask 1 of ETH 1 255 SM1-2 0 – 255 Subnet mask 2 of ETH 1 255 SM1-3 0 – 255 Subnet mask 3 of ETH 1 255 SM1-4 0 – 255 Subnet mask 4 of ETH 1 0 GW1-1 0 – 254 Default gateway of ETH1 192 GW1-2 0 – 254 Default gateway of ETH1 168 GW1-3 0 – 254 Default gateway of ETH1 19 GW1-4 0 – 254 Default gateway of ETH1 1 SI1-1 0 – 254 SNTP server address 1 0 SI1-2 0 – 254 SNTP server address 2 0 SI1-3 0 – 254 SNTP server address 3 0 SI1-4 0 – 254 SNTP server address 4 0 PG1-1 0 – 254 Ping check add1 of ETH1 0 PG1-2 0 – 254 Ping check add2 of ETH1 0 PG1-3 0 – 254 Ping check add3 of ETH1 0 PG1-4 0 – 254 Ping check add4 of ETH1 0 SMODE Off / On SNTP mode 0(Off) DEADT 1 – 32400 s Keep-arrive timeout 7200

GOINT 1 – 60 s GOOSE receive check interval 60

Event Record

BI1 comm. None/Operate/ Reset/Both BI1 command trigger Both(3)






Disturbance Record

Time1 0.1 – 4.9 s Recording period before fault

3.0

Time2 0.1 – 4.9 s Recording period after fault

2.0

OV 10.0 – 200.0 V OV element for disturbance UV 1.0 – 130.0 V UV element for disturbance NPS 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS element for disturbance ZPS 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS element for disturbance Trip Off / On Disturbance trigger On

172

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default Disturbance Record

BI Off / On Disturbance trigger On OV Off / On Disturbance trigger On UV Off / On Disturbance Trigger On NPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On ZPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On SIG1 0 – 361

Disturbance Trigger

51 SIG2 0 – 361 52 SIG3 0 – 361 53 SIG4 0 – 361 63 SIG5 0 – 361 102 SIG6 0 – 361 103 SIG7 0 – 361 104 SIG8 0 – 361 117 SIG9 0 – 361 141 SIG10 0 – 361 142 SIG11 0 – 361 143 SIG12 0 – 361 144 SIG13 0 – 361 145 SIG14 0 – 361 0 SIG15 0 – 361 0 SIG16…30 0 – 361 0 SIG31 0 – 361 0 SIG32 0 – 361 0

Counter

TCSPEN Off / On / Opt-On Trip Circuit Supervision Enable

Off

CBSMEN Off / On Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable

Off

TCAEN Off / On Trip Count Alarm Enable Off

TCALM 1 – 10000 Trip Count Alarm Threshold

10000

Status Display Pri / Sec Metering Pri

Time sync. Off / BI / Modbus / 103 / SNTP Time synch setting Off

Binary Input

BITHR1 48 / 110 /220 BI1,BI2 Threshold 110 BITHR2 110 / 220 BI3-BI6 Threshold 110 BI1

BI1PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Pick-up delay 0.00 BI1DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Drop-off delay 0.00 BI1SNS Norm / Inv BI1 Trigger Norm BI1SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI1 Settings Group Off OV1BLK Off / On OV1 Block Off OV2BLK Off / On OV2 Block Off OV3BLK Off / On OV3 Block Off UV1BLK Off / On UV1 Block Off UV2BLK Off / On UV2 Block Off UV3BLK Off / On UV3 Block Off ZP1BLK Off / On ZPS1 Block Off ZP2BLK Off / On ZPS2 Block Off NP1BLK Off / On NPS1 Block Off NP2BLK Off / On NPS2 Block Off TCFALM Off / On Trip Circuit Fail Alarm Off

173

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default Binary Input

BI1

CBOPN Off / On Circuit Breaker Open Off CBCLS Off / On Circuit Breaker Closed Off EXT3PH Off / On External Trip 3 Phase Off EXTAPH Off / On External Trip A Phase Off EXTBPH Off / On External Trip B Phase Off EXTCPH Off / On External Trip C Phase Off RMTRST Off / On Remote Reset Off SYNCLK Off / On Synchronize clock Off STORCD Off / On Store Disturbance Record Off Alarm1 Off / On Alarm screen 1 Off Alarm2 Off / On Alarm screen 2 Off Alarm3 Off / On Alarm screen 3 Off Alarm4 Off / On Alarm screen 4 Off RMTOPN Off / On Remote CB Open Control Off RMTCLS Off / On Remote CB Close Control Off CNTLCK Off / On Interlock input Off FRQ1BLK Off / On FRQ1 Block Off FRQ2BLK Off / On FRQ2 Block Off FRQ3BLK Off / On FRQ3 Block Off FRQ4BLK Off / On FRQ4 Block Off

BI2

BI2PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI2 Pick-up delay 0.00 BI2DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI2 Drop-off delay 0.00 BI2SNS Norm / Inv BI2 Trigger Norm BI2SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI2 Settings Group Off The following items are same as BI1

BI3

BI3PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI3 Pick-up delay 0.00 BI3DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI3 Drop-off delay 0.00 BI3SNS Norm / Inv BI3 Trigger Norm BI3SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI3 Settings Group Off The following items are same as BI1

BI4

BI4PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI4 Pick-up delay 0.00 BI4DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI4 Drop-off Delay 0.00 BI4SNS Norm / Inv BI4 Trigger Norm BI4SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI4 Settings Group Off The following items are same as BI1

BI5


BI6


Binary Output

BO1

Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR Reset Ins / DI / Dw / Lat Reset Operation DI In #1 0 – 361 Functions 141 In #2 0 – 361 Functions 0 In #3 0 – 361 Functions 0

174

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default Binary Output

BO1 In #4 0 – 361 Functions 0 TBO 0.00 – 10.00 s Delay / Pulse width 0.20

BO2 Same as BO1 BO3 Same as BO1 BO4 Same as BO1 BO5 Same as BO1 (for model 412) BO6 Same as BO1 (for model 412) BO7 Same as BO1 (for model 412) BO8 Same as BO1 (for model 412)

Confi- gurable LED

LED1

Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR Reset Inst / Latch Reset Operation Inst In #1 0 – 361 Functions 0 In #2 0 – 361 Functions 0 In #3 0 – 361 Functions 0 In #4 0 – 361 Functions 0 Color R / G / Y LED Color R

LED2 Same as LED1 LED3 Same as LED1 LED4 Same as LED1 LED5 Same as LED1 LED6 Same as LED1 CB CLOSED Color R / G / Y CB CLOSED LED Color R IND1 Reset Inst / Latch IND1 Reset operation Inst IND2 Reset Inst / Latch IND2 Reset operation Inst

IND1

BIT1 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0 BIT2 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0 BIT3 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0 BIT4 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0 BIT5 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0 BIT6 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0 BIT7 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0 BIT8 0 – 361 Virtual LED 0

IND2 Same as IND1

Active group / Common

Active gp. 1 - 2 Active setting group 1

AOLED Off / On ALARM LED lighting control at alarm output On

Control Disable / Enable Control Enable Disable Interlock Disable / Enable Interlock Enable Disable

Control Hierarchy Local / Remote Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)

-- (Local)

Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz Frequency 50Hz

175

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Menu Name Range Contents Default Protection

Line name Specified by user Line name -- PVT 1 – 20000 VT ratio of Phase VT 100 RVT 1 – 20000 VT ratio of Earth Fault CT 100

SVCNT ALM&BLK/ALM AC input imbalance ALM& BLK

OV OV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV1 Enable Off OV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C OV2 Enable Off OV3EN Off / On OV3 Enable Off

UV

UV1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV1 Enable DT UV2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C UV2 Enable Off UV3EN Off / On UV3 Enable Off VBKEN Off / On UV Block Enable Off

ZPS ZPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS1 Enable DT ZPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C ZPS2 Enable Off

NPS NPS1EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS1 Enable Off NPS2EN Off / DT/IDMT/C NPS2 Enable Off

FRQ

FT1 Off/O/U/B/ OO/UU FRQ1 Enable B

DFT1 Off/R/D/Both DFRQ1 Enable Both Logic1 L1/L2/L3/L4/L5 FRQ1 logic L1







OV

OV1 10.0 – 200.0 V OV1 Threshold 120.0 V

TOV1 0.05 – 100.00 OV1 Time multiplier (if OV1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TOV1 0.00 – 300.00 s OV1 Definite time (if OV1EN = DT)

0.10 s

TOV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s OV1DPR 10 – 98 % OV1 DO/PU ratio 95% OV2 10.0 – 200.0 V OV2 Threshold 140.0 V

TOV2 0.05 – 100.00 OV2 Time multiplier (if OV2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TOV2 0.00 – 300.00 s OV2 Definite time (if OV2EN = DT)

0.10 s

TOV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s OV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s OV2DPR 10 – 98 % OV2 DO/PU ratio 95% OV3 10.0 – 200.0 V OV3 Threshold 160.0 V TOV3 0.00 – 300.00 s OV3 Definite time 0.10 s OV3DPR 10 – 98 % OV3 DO/PU ratio 95% OV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT 1.00

176

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6


OV

OV1-α 0.00 – 5.00 Curve setting. (if OV1EN = C)

1.00 OV1-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000 OV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT

Curve setting. (if OV2EN = C)

1.00 OV2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 OV2-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000

UV

UV1 5.0 – 130.0 V UV1 Threshold 60.0 V

TUV1 0.05 – 100.00 UV1 Time multiplier (if UV1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TUV1 0.00 – 300.00 s UV1 Definite time (if UV1EN = DT)

0.10 s

TUV1R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV1 Definite time reset 0.0 s UV2 5.0 – 130.0 V UV2 Threshold 60.0 V

TUV2 0.05 – 100.00 UV2 Time multiplier (if UV2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TUV2 0.00 – 300.00 s UV2 Definite time (if UV2EN = DT)

0.10 s

TUV2R 0.0 – 300.0 s UV2 Definite time reset 0.0 s UV3 5.0 – 130.0 V UV3 Threshold 20.0 V TUV3 0.00 – 300.00 s UV3 Definite time 0.10 s VBLK 5.0 – 20.0 V UV Blocking 10.0 V UV1-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT

Curve setting. (if UV1EN = C)

1.00 UV1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 UV1-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000 UV2-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT

Curve setting. (if UV2EN = C)

1.00 UV2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 UV2-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000

ZPS

ZPS1 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS1 Threshold 20.0 V

TZPS1 0.05 – 100.00 ZPS1 Time multiplier (if ZPS1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TZPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s ZPS1 Definite time (if ZPS1EN = DT)

0.00 s

TZPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS1 Definite time reset 0.0 s ZPS2 1.0 – 160.0 V ZPS2 Threshold 40.0 V

TZPS2 0.05 – 100.00 ZPS2 Time multiplier (if ZPS2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TZPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s ZPS2 Definite time (if ZPS2EN = DT)

0.00 s

TZPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s ZPS2 Definite time reset 0.0 s ZPS1-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT

Curve setting. (if ZPS1EN = C)

1.00 ZPS1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 ZPS1-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000 ZPS2-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT

Curve setting. (if ZPS2EN = C)

1.00 ZPS2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 ZPS2-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000

NPS

NPS1 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS1 Threshold 20.0 V

TNPS1 0.05 – 100.00 NPS1 Time multiplier (if NPS1EN = IDMT)

10.00

TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s NPS1 Definite time (if NPS1EN = DT)

0.00 s

TNPS1R 0.0 – 300.0 s NPS1 Definite time reset 0.0 s

177

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6


NPS

NPS2 1.0 – 160.0 V NPS2 Threshold 40.0 V

TNPS2 0.05 – 100.00 NPS2 Time multiplier (if NPS2EN = IDMT)

10.00

TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s NPS2 Definite time (if NPS2EN = DT)

0.00 s

TNPS2R 0.0 – 300.0 s NPS2 Definite time reset 0.0 s NPS1-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT

Curve setting. (if NPS1EN = C)

1.00 NPS1-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 NPS1-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000 NPS2-k 0.00 – 300.00 Configurable IDMT

Curve setting. (if NPS2EN = C)

1.00 NPS2-α 0.00 – 5.00 1.00 NPS2-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000

FRQ

F11 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Over frequency stage 1 threshold

51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz

TF11 0.00 – 100.00 s OF1 time delay 1.00 s

F12 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Under frequency stage1 Threshold

49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz

TF12 0.00 – 100.00 s UF1 time delay 1.00 s DF1 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s DFRQ stage1 0.5 Hz/s

F21 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz

Over frequency stage 2 Threshold

51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz


F22 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz


49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz


F31 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz


51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz


F32 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz


49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz


F41 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz


51.00 Hz 61.00 Hz


F42 45.00 – 55.00 Hz 54.00 – 66.00 Hz


49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz

TF42 0.00 – 100.00 s UF4 time delay 1.00 s DF4 0.1 – 9.9 Hz/s DFRQ stage4 0.5 Hz/s FVBLK 40 – 100 V Under voltage block 40 V

Test

A.M.F. Off / On Automatic monitoring Off UVTEST Off / On Under voltage test Off IECTST Off / On IEC103 test mode Off

178

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix H

Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 1. Relay identification

2. Preliminary check

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check

3.3 AC input circuit check

4. Function test

4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test

4.2 Negative sequence overvoltage elements test

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

179

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

1. Relay identification

Type Serial number

Model System frequency

Station Date

Circuit Engineer

Protection scheme Witness

Active settings group number

2. Preliminary check

Ratings

Power supply

Wiring

Calendar and clock

3. Hardware check

3.1 User interface check

3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check Binary input circuit

Binary output circuit

3.3 AC input circuit check

180

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4. Function test

4.1 Overvoltage and undervoltage elements test (1) Operating value test

Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

OV1

OV2

OV3

UV1

UV2

UV3

ZPS1

ZPS2

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

OV1 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

OV2 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

UV1 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

UV2 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

ZPS1 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

ZPS2 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

181

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4.2 Negative overvoltage elements test (1) Operating value test

Element Voltage setting Measured voltage

NPS1

NPS2

(2) Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Multiplier setting Changed voltage Measured time

NPS1 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

NPS2 × Voltage setting × Voltage setting × Voltage setting

4.3 Frequency elements test

Element Frequency setting Measured frequency

FRQ1

FRQ2

FRQ3

FRQ4

5. Protection scheme test

6. Metering and recording check

7. Conjunctive test

Scheme Results

On load check Tripping circuit

182

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix I

Return Repair Form

183

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please complete this form and return it to TOSHIBA CORPORATION together with the GRE130 to be repaired.

TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Operations – Industrial and Power Systems & Services

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan

For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department

Quality Assurance Section

Type: GRE130 Model:

(Example: Type: GRE130 Model: 411A )

Product No.:

Serial No.:

Date:

1. Reason for returning the relay

mal-function

does not operate

increased error

investigation required

others

2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are very helpful information to investigate the incident.

Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on USB stick or CD rom, or fill in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.

184

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Fault Record Date/Month/Year Time / / / : : .

(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2012 15:09:58.442)

Faulty phase:

Prefault values Van: V Vbn: V Vcn: V Vab: V Vbc: V Vca: V Vph: V V0: V V1: V V2: V f: Hz

Fault values Van: V Vbn: V Vcn: V Vab: V Vbc: V Vca: V Vph: V V0: V V1: V V2: V f: Hz

185

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?

4. Describe the details of the incident:

5. Date incident occurred

Day/Month/Year: / / /

(Example: 10/Dec/2012)

6. Give any comments about the GRE130, including any relevant documents:

186

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Customer

Name:

Company Name:

Address:

Telephone No.:

Facsimile No.:

Signature:

187

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix J

Technical Data

188

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

TECHNICAL DATA Ratings AC voltage Vn: 63.5V / 110V Frequency: 50/60Hz Power supply: 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac

(Operative range: 88–300Vdc / 88–264Vac)

48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)

24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc) Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply: maximum 12% Power supply interruption: maximum 50ms at 110V Binary input circuit DC voltage: For alarm indication

110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc) 48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 132Vdc) 24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)

For trip circuit supervision Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)

≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating) ≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating) ≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)

Overload Ratings AC voltage inputs: 2 times rated voltage continuous Burden AC phase voltage inputs: ≤ 0.1 VA (at rated voltage) Power supply: ≤ 10W (quiescent), ≤ 15W (maximum) Binary input circuit: ≤ 0.5W per input at 220Vdc Overvoltage Protection (59) 1st, 2nd, 3rd Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 10.0 – 200.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type: DTL, IDMTL IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps DO/PU ratio 10 - 98% in 1% steps Reset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps Undervoltage Protection (27) 1st, 2nd, 3rd Undervoltage thresholds: OFF, 5.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type: DTL, IDMTL IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay: Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps Zero Sequence Overvoltage (ZPS) Protection (59N) 1st, 2nd ZPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps

189

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (NPS) Protection (47) 1st, 2nd NPS Overvoltage thresholds: OFF, 1.0 – 130.0V in 0.1V steps Delay type (1st threshold only): DTL, IDMTL IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.05 - 100.00 in 0.01 steps DTL delay: Inst, 0.01 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps Reset Delay (1st threshold only): Instantaneous, 0.1 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps Frequency Protection (81U/O) 1st – 4th Under frequency

45.00 – 50.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz) 54.00 – 60.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)

1st – 4th Under frequency 50.00 – 55.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 50Hz) 60.00 – 66.00 Hz in 0.01Hz steps (rated frequency: 60Hz)

Frequency rate-of-change +0.1 to +9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps −0.1 to −9.9Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps

Timer for stage 1st - 4th 0.00 – 100.00 s in 0.01 s steps Frequency UV Block 40 – 100V in 1V steps

Accuracy IDMTL Overvoltage Pick-up:

All Other Overvoltage Pick-ups:

100% of setting ± 5%

100% of setting ± 5% Overvoltage PU/DO ratio: approx, 95% (settable for phase overvoltage) IDMTL Undervoltage Pick-up: 95% of setting ± 5% All Other Undervoltage Pick-ups: 100% of setting ± 5% Undervoltage PU/DO ratio: Over Frequency Pick-ups: Under Frequency Pick-ups: Frequency rate-of-change Pick-ups:

approx, 105% 100% of setting ± 0.05Hz (setting: ≥ rated frequency - 5.00Hz) 100% of setting ± 0.05Hz (setting: ≤ rated frequency + 5.00Hz) 100% of setting ± 0.07Hz/s (setting: ≤ 5.00Hz/s)

Inverse Operate Time: IEC60255-127, ±5% or 100ms

(OV; 1.2 ≤ G/Gs ≤ GD/Gs , UV; 0 ≤ G/Gs ≤ 1) GD = 300V OV Definite Operate Time; ≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

UV Definite Operate Time; ≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≤ 80% of setting)

ZPS Definite Operate Time; ≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

NPS Definite Operate Time; ≤DTL + 50ms (DT, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

Under/Over Frequency Operate Time Frequency rate-of-change Operate Time

DTL + 80-200ms (rated frequency: 50Hz)

DTL + 70-170ms (rated frequency: 60Hz)

190-300ms (rated frequency: 50Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

160-250ms (rated frequency: 60Hz, input: ≥ 200% of setting)

Time delays includes operating time of trip contacts Front Communication port - local PC (USB2.0) Connector type: USB-Type B Cable length: 5m (max.) Rear Communication port - remote PC (RS485) Connection: Multidrop (max. 32 relays) Cable type: Twisted pair Cable length: 1200m (max.)

190

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Connector: Screw terminals Isolation: 1kVac for 1 min. Transmission rate: 19.2 kbps Rear Communication port (Ethernet)

100BASE-TX

100BASE-FX

RJ-45 connector

SC connector Binary Inputs Operating voltage For signal detection

Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating

Typical 77Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating

Typical 33.6Vdc (min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating

Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating

For trip circuit supervision

≥88V for 220/250Vdc rating

≥38.4Vdc for 110Vdc rating

≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating

≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating Binary Outputs Number 4 or 8 (excluding Relay Fail contact) Ratings

model 410 and 411; BO#1 and #2

model 412: BO#1,#2,#5 and #6

other BOs

Make and carry: 5A continuously

Make and carry: 5A continuously Contact : 0.4A 250Vdc, 8A 380Vac, 3040VA, 150W

Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=40ms) Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)

Make and carry: 4A continuously Contact: 0.2A 110Vdc, 8A 250Vac, 2000VA, 240W

Durability:

Pickup time:

Reset time:

Loaded contact: ≥1,000 operations

Unloaded contact: ≥10,000 operations

Less than 15ms

Less than 10ms Mechanical design Weight 1.5kg for model 410A and 411A

1.8kg for model 412A Width 149mm for model 410A and 411A

223mm for model 412A Height 177mm

Depth 168mm

Case color Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5 Installation Flush mounting with attachment kits

191

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE Test Standards Details

Atmospheric Environment Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2

IEC 60068-2-30 Operating range: -20°C to +60°C. Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.

Humidity IEC 60068-2-78 56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity. Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 (front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)

Mechanical Environment Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1

Endurance - Class 1 Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1

Shock Withstand Class 1 Bump Class 1

Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1

Electrical Environment Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-5

IEEE C37.90.0 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth. 2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits. 1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.

High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak) for CT, Power Supply Unit (PSU), BI and BO circuits; between terminals and earth, and between independent circuits 3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth 3kV (peak) for BO circuit; across normally open contacts

1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals and earth.

Electromagnetic Environment High Frequency Disturbance / Damped Oscillatory Wave

IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, IEC 61000-4-12 IEEE C37.90.1

1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV (peak) applied to all ports in common mode. 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.

Electrostatic Discharge

IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3, IEC 61000-4-2

6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.

Radiated RF Electromagnetic Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-3 Class 3, IEC 61000-4-3

Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450, 900 and 1890MHz.

Fast Transient Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-4 Class A, IEC 61000-4-4, IEEE C37.90.1

4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.

Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5, IEC 61000-4-5

1.2/50µs surge in common/differential modes: HV, PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak) RS485 port: 1kV (peak)

Conducted RF Electromagnetic Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-6 Class 3, IEC 61000-4-6

10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz. Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.

Power Frequency Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-7 Class A, IEC 61000-4-16

300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode. 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode. Not applicable to AC inputs.

192

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Test Standards Details Conducted and Radiated Emissions

IEC 60255-25, EN 55022 Class A, IEC 61000-6-4

Conducted emissions: 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean) 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean) Radiated emissions (at 10m): 30 to 230MHz: <40dB 230 to 1000MHz: <47dB

European Commission Directives

89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to generic EMC standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.

73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard EN 60255-27.

193

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix K

Symbols Used in Scheme Logic

194

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

The symbols used in the scheme logic and their respective meanings are as follows:

Signal names Marked with : Measuring element output signal

Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to external equipment

Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch

Marked with " " : Scheme switch position

Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal

AND gates

A B C Output 1 1 1 1

Other cases 0


Other cases 0


Other cases 0

OR gates


Other cases 1


Other cases 1


Other cases 1

A

Output B &

C

A

Output B ≥1

C

A

Output B &

C

A

Output B ≥1 C

A

Output B ≥1 C

A

Output B

C &

195

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Signal inversion

A Output 0 1 1 0

Timer Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting

XXX: Set time

Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range

Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting


One-shot timer


Flip-flop S R Output 0 0 No change 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0

Scheme switch A Switch Output 1 ON 1

Other cases 0

Switch Output

ON 1 OFF 0

Output A

0 t

XXX

t 0

XXX

0 t

XXX - YYY

XXX - YYY

t 0

Output

Output ON

ON +

A

S Output F/F

R

1

XXX - YYY

A Output A

Output

196

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix L

Modbus: Interoperability

197

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Modbus: Interoperability 1. Physical and Data Link Layer

- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface - RTU mode only - Coding System: 8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit) Even parity - Address setting range: 1-247 - Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200

2. Application Layer

(1) Modbus response format

FC Description Supplementary explanation 01 Read Coils Returns remote control enable flag 02 Read Discrete Inputs Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc. 03 Read Holding Registers - 04 Read Input Register Returns value of analog inputs 05 Write Single Coil Remote command and Time synchronization 06 Write Single Register Need to specify record number 07 Read Exception status Returns relay and CB status 08 Diagnostic - 16 Write Multiple Registers Current time setting, etc. 17 Report Slave ID Returns device ID 43 Read device Identification (SC:14) Returns device information

For FC=01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described in "MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".

For other FCs, the response format is as following:

07 Read Exception status Response Data Output Data (1byte)

bit Description 0 IN SERVICE (LED) 1 TRIP (LED) 2 ALARM (LED) 3 RELAY FAIL (LED) 4 CB CLOSED (LED) 5 CB OPEN (LED) 6 Relay fail output (BO) 7 <Reserved> 08 Diagnostic Response Data

198

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

SC Response Data Field Description 00 Echo Request Data (2Bytes) Return Query Data 01 <not supported> 02 Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes) Return Diagnostic Register bit0 IN SERVICE (LED) bit1 TRIP (LED) bit2 ALARM (LED) bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED) bit4 <Reserved> bit5 <Reserved> bit6 <Reserved> bit7 <Reserved> bit8 3-phase current balance alarm bit9 CB contact status alarm bit10 CB operation number alarm bit11 <Reserved> bit12 V0 error alarm bit13 V2 error alarm bit14 <Reserved> bit15 <Reserved> 03- <not supported> 17 Report Slave ID Response Data Byte Count (1byte) 18bytes Slave ID (17bytes) Relay type and model ID GRE130-411A-10-10 ASCII Run Indicator Status (1byte) 0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service 43 Read Device Identification (SC:14) Response Data Param OID 01 Basic device identification 00 TOSHIBA Vendor Name 01 GRE130-411 Product Code 02 A Major Minor Revision 02 Regular device identification 03 <Non> Vendor URL 04 GRE130 Product Name 05 411A-10-10 Model Name 06 Overvoltage Relay User Application Name 07- <Reserved> Reserved 03 Extended device identification 80 <SPACE> 81 GS1EM1-03-A Software version

04 <not supported> One specific identification object

199

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

(2) Modbus address map group Modbus data model Address(ID) Number Data specification Coils 0x0200 1 Remote control (enable flag)

(Read/Write) 0x0400 4 Remote control (command, interlock), Time synchronization, Clear command

Discrete Input 0x1000 6 BI 0x1016 5 Relay fail output, BO (Read Only) 0x1040 14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status) 0x1080 16 Virtual LED 0x1201 － Signal list (see Appendix A for detail)

Input Registers 0x2000 40 Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc., not converted to engineering units) 2-word long

(Read Only) 0x2800 40 Analog data (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca, V0 etc., converted to engineering units) 2-word long

Holding Registers 0x3000 29 Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records, write protected

(Read/Write) 0x3200 72 Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200 records, write protected

0x3800 4 Current time data (IEC format) 0x3810 30 Counter data (number of trips etc), 2-word long 0x3E82 2 Password for remote control 0x4000 － Setting value (see Appendix H for detail), Read Only 0x8000 Undefined after this address

Discrete Input Single bit Read-Only Coils Single bit Read-Write Input Registers 16-bit word Read-Only Holding Registers 16-bit word Read-Write

(3)Modbus address map Address Description Supplementary explanation Coils Remote control (R/W) 0200 Remote control enable flag 0400 Remote control command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off) 0401 Remote interlock command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on/off) 0402 Remote reset command Write (control) is enable only 0x0200=1 (on)

0403 Time synchronization command Call time synchronization task (on)

200

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation Discrete Input BI status (R) 1000 BI1 1001 BI2 1002 BI3 Only for GRE130-411A 1003 BI4 Only for GRE130-411A 1004 BI5 Only for GRE130-411A 1005 BI6 Only for GRE130-411A BO status (R) 1016 Relay fail output 1017 BO1 1018 BO2 1019 BO3 101A BO4 101B BO5 Only for GRE130-412A 101C BO6 Only for GRE130-412A 101D BO7 Only for GRE130-412A 101E BO8 Only for GRE130-412A LED lamp status (R) 1040 IN SERVICE 1041 TRIP 1042 ALARM 1043 RELAY FAIL 1044 CB CLOSED 1045 CB OPEN 1046 LOCAL 1047 REMOTE 1048 LED1 1049 LED2 104A LED3 104B LED4 104C LED5 104D LED6 Virtual LED status (R) 1080 IND1 BIT1 1081 IND1 BIT2 1082 IND1 BIT3 1083 IND1 BIT4 1084 IND1 BIT5 1085 IND1 BIT6 1086 IND1 BIT7 1087 IND1 BIT8 1088 IND2 BIT1 1089 IND2 BIT2

201

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation Signal list (R) 1201 Signal No.1 See Appendix A 1202 Signal No.2 See Appendix A … Signal No.n Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n. See Appendix A

Address Description Supplementary explanation Input Registers Analog data (R) Followings are NOT converted to engineering units. 2000 Van / Vab / Vph (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2001 Van / Vab / Vph (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 2002 Van / Vab (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 2003 Van / Vab (L) 2004 Vbn / Vbc (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2005 Vbn / Vbc (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 2006 Vbn / Vbc (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 2007 Vbn / Vbc (L) 2008 Vcn / Vca (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2009 Vcn / Vca (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 200A Vcn / Vca (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 200B Vcn / Vca (L) 200C V0 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 200D V0 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 200E V0 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 200F V0 (L) 2010 V2 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2011 V2 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 2012 V2 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 2013 V2 (L) 2014 V1 (H) Primary: value×0.125×PVT_RATIO/1000(kV) 2015 V1 (L) Secondary: Value×0.125(V) 2016 V1 (H) Phase angle: value×0.01 (deg) 2017 V1 (L) 2018 <Reserved> 2019 <Reserved> 201A <Reserved> 201B <Reserved>

Address Description Supplementary explanation 108A IND2 BIT3 108B IND2 BIT4 108C IND2 BIT5 108D IND2 BIT6 108E IND2 BIT7 108F IND2 BIT8

202

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation 201C <Reserved> 201D <Reserved> 201E <Reserved> 201F <Reserved> 2020 <Reserved> 2021 <Reserved> 2022 <Reserved> 2023 <Reserved> 2024 <Reserved> 2025 <Reserved> 2026 f (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)

2027 f (L) 2028 fmax (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)

2029 fmax (L) 202A fmin (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)

202B fmin (L) 202C df / dt (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)

202D df / dt (L) 202E df / dtx (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)

202F df / dtx (L) 2030 df / dtn (H) f × 0.01 (Hz)

2031 df / dtn (L) 2032 <Reserved>

2033 <Reserved> 2034 <Reserved>

2035 <Reserved> 2036 <Reserved>

2037 <Reserved>

Address Description Supplementary explanation

Analog data (R) The following are converted to engineering units. (the same as the displayed value)

2800 Van (H) 2801 Van (L) 2802 Van (H) 2803 Van (L) 2804 Vbn (H) 2805 Vbn (L) 2806 Vbn (H) 2807 Vbn (L) 2808 Vcn (H) 2809 Vcn (L) 280A Vcn (H) 280B Vcn (L) 280C Vab (H)

203

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation 280D Vab (L) 280E Vab (H) 280F Vab (L) 2810 Vbc (H) 2811 Vbc (L) 2812 Vbc (H) 2813 Vbc (L) 2814 Vca (H) 2815 Vca (L) 2816 Vca (H) 2817 Vca (L) 2818 Vph (H) 2819 Vph (L) 281A V0 (H) 281B V0 (L) 281C V0 (H) 281D V0 (L) 281E V1 (H) 281F V1 (L) 2820 V1 (H) 2821 V1 (L) 2822 V2 (H) 2823 V2 (L) 2824 V2 (H) 2825 V2 (L) 2826 f (H) 2827 f (L) 2828 fmax (H) 2829 fmax (L) 282A fmin (H) 282B fmin (L) 282C df / dt (H) 282D df / dt (L) 282E df / dtx (H) 282F df / dtx (L) 2830 df / dtn (H) 2831 df / dtn (L) 2832 <Reserved> 2833 <Reserved> 2834 <Reserved> 2835 <Reserved> 2836 <Reserved> 2837 <Reserved>

204

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation Holding Registers Fault record (R) 3000 records count Number of record saved (max. 4)

3001 No.1 Indication of record #1. If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3002 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3003 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3004 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3005 year 0-99(y) 3006 Fault phase 3007 Trip mode


3009 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 300A hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 300B months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 300C year 0-99(y) 300D Fault phase 300E Trip mode

300F No.3 Indication of record #3. If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

3010 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3011 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3012 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3013 year 0-99(y) 3014 Fault phase 3015 Trip mode


3017 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3018 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3019 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 301A year 0-99(y) 301B Fault phase 301C Trip mode

205

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation Event record (R) 10 records are obtained at a time. 3200 records count Number of records saved (max. 200) 3201 set No. (R/W) Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 10 records) 3202 No. X Returns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0. 3203 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3204 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3205 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3206 year 0-99(y) 3207 Event ID See Appendix B 3208 Action 1:on 、2:off、

3209 No.X+1 Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

320A milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 320B hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 320C months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 320D year 0-99(y) 320E Event ID See Appendix B 320F Action 1:on 、2:off


3211 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3212 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3213 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3214 year 0-99(y) 3215 Event ID See Appendix B 3216 Action 1:on 、2:off


3218 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3219 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 321A months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 321B year 0-99(y) 321C Event ID See Appendix B 321D Action 1:on 、2:off

321E No.X+4 Returns "Set No.+4". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

321F milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3220 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3221 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3222 year 0-99(y) 3223 Event ID See Appendix B 3224 Action 1:on 、2:off

206

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation


3226 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3227 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3228 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3229 year 0-99(y) 322A Event ID See Appendix B 322B Action 1:on 、2:off

322C No.X+6 Returns "Set No.+6". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

322D milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 322E hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 322F months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3230 year 0-99(y) 3231 Event ID See Appendix B 3232 Action 1:on 、2:off



323A No.X+8 Returns "Set No.+8". If no data, all of the following data is set to 0.

323B milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 323C hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 323D months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 323E year 0-99(y) 323F Event ID See Appendix B 3240 Action 1:on 、2:off



207

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Address Description Supplementary explanation Current time data (R/W) Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format 3800 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond) 3801 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m) 3802 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d) 3803 year 0-99(y) Counters (R/W) 3810 Trips Phase-A (H) Can be set to an initial value. 3811 Trips Phase-A (L) 3812 Trips Phase-B (H) Can be set to an initial value. 3813 Trips Phase-B (L) 3814 Trips Phase-C (H) Can be set to an initial value. 3815 Trips Phase-C (L) 3816 Trips any phase (H) Can be set to an initial value. 3817 Trips any phase (L) Password 3E82 Control (H) Password for remote control (in ASCII code) 3E83 Control (L) Setting values 4000 See the next table for setting values. 7FFF <Reserved>

208

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

(4) Modbus address for setting values Setting Group

(Menu) Address Name Contents

Event Record

6034 BI1 comm. BI 1 command trigger setting 6035 BI2 comm. BI 2 command trigger setting 6036 BI3 comm. BI 3 command trigger setting 6037 BI4 comm. BI 4 command trigger setting 6038 BI5 comm. BI 5 command trigger setting 6039 BI6 comm. BI 6 command trigger setting

Disturbance Record

603C Time1 Disturbance record period before fault 6000 Time2 Disturbance record period after fault 6001 OV OC element for disturbance 6002 UV EF element for disturbance 6003 ZPS SEF element for disturbance 6004 NPS NPS element for disturbance 6005 Trip Disturbance trigger 6006 BI Disturbance trigger 6007 OV Disturbance trigger 6008 UV Disturbance trigger 6009 ZPS Disturbance trigger 600A NPS Disturbance trigger 603D FRQ Disturbance trigger 600B SIG1 Disturbance trigger 600C SIG2 Disturbance trigger 600D SIG3 Disturbance trigger 600E SIG4 Disturbance trigger 600F SIG5 Disturbance trigger 6010 SIG6 Disturbance trigger 6011 SIG7 Disturbance trigger 6012 SIG8 Disturbance trigger 6013 SIG9 Disturbance trigger 6014 SIG10 Disturbance trigger 6015 SIG11 Disturbance trigger 6016 SIG12 Disturbance trigger 6017 SIG13 Disturbance trigger 6018 SIG14 Disturbance trigger 6019 SIG15 Disturbance trigger 601A SIG16 Disturbance trigger 601B SIG17 Disturbance trigger 601C SIG18 Disturbance trigger 601D SIG19 Disturbance trigger 601E SIG20 Disturbance trigger 601F SIG21 Disturbance trigger 6020 SIG22 Disturbance trigger 6021 SIG23 Disturbance trigger 6022 SIG24 Disturbance trigger

209

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Setting Group (Menu)

Address Name Contents

Disturbance Record

6023 SIG25 Disturbance trigger 6024 SIG26 Disturbance trigger 6025 SIG27 Disturbance trigger 6026 SIG28 Disturbance trigger 6027 SIG29 Disturbance trigger 6028 SIG30 Disturbance trigger 6029 SIG31 Disturbance trigger 602A SIG32 Disturbance trigger

Counter

602B TCSPEN Trip Circuit Supervision Enable 602C CBSMEN Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable 602D TCAEN Trip Count Alarm Enable 6030 TCALM Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting

Status

6400 Display Metering 6401 Time sync. Time synchronization method 6402 GMT Time zone (Hours) 640A GMTm Time zone (minutes)

Binary Input

6C00 BITHR1 BI threshold for BI1 & BI2 6C01 BITHR2 BI threshold for BI3-6 6C02 BI1 BI1PUD Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay 6C03 BI1 BI1DOD Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay 6C04 BI1 BI1SNS Binary Input 1 Sense 6C05 BI1 BI1SGS Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select 6C06 BI1 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C07 BI1 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C08 BI1 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C09 BI1 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6C0A BI1 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C0B BI1 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C0C BI1 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C0D BI1 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C0E BI1 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C0F BI1 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C10 BI1 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C11 BI1 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C12 BI1 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C13 BI1 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6C14 BI1 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6C15 BI1 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6C16 BI1 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6C17 BI1 RMTRST Remote Reset 6C18 BI1 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6C19 BI1 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6C1A BI1 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6C1B BI1 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.

210

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Binary Input

6C1C BI1 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6C1D BI1 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6C1E BI1 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6C1F BI1 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6C20 BI1 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6C21 BI1 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6C22 BI1 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6C23 BI1 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6C24 BI1 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6C25 BI2 BI2PUD Binary Input 2 Pick-up delay 6C26 BI2 BI2DOD Binary Input 2 Drop-off delay 6C27 BI2 BI2SNS Binary Input 2 Sense 6C28 BI2 BI2SGS Binary Input 2 Settings Group Select 6C29 BI2 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C2A BI2 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C2B BI2 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C2C BI2 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6C2D BI2 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C2E BI2 UV3BLK UV3 Block

6C2F BI2 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C30 BI2 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C31 BI2 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C32 BI2 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C33 BI2 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C34 BI2 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C35 BI2 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C36 BI2 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6C37 BI2 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6C38 BI2 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6C39 BI2 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6C3A BI2 RMTRST Remote Reset 6C3B BI2 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6C3C BI2 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6C3D BI2 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6C3E BI2 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6C3F BI2 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6C40 BI2 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6C41 BI2 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6C42 BI2 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6C43 BI2 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6C44 BI2 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6C45 BI2 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6C46 BI2 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6C47 BI2 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

211

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



6C48 BI3 BI3PUD Binary Input 3 Pick-up delay 6C49 BI3 BI3DOD Binary Input 3 Drop-off delay 6C4A BI3 BI3SNS Binary Input 3 Sense 6C4B BI3 BI3SGS Binary Input 3 Settings Group Select 6C4C BI3 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C4D BI3 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C4E BI3 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C4F BI3 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6C50 BI3 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C51 BI3 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C52 BI3 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C53 BI3 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C54 BI3 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C55 BI3 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C56 BI3 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C57 BI3 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C58 BI3 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C59 BI3 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6C5A BI3 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase Binary Input 6C5B BI3 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6C5C BI3 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6C5D BI3 RMTRST Remote Reset 6C5E BI3 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6C5F BI3 STORCD Store Disturbance Record

6C60 BI3 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6C61 BI3 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6C62 BI3 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6C63 BI3 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6C64 BI3 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6C65 BI3 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6C66 BI3 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6C67 BI3 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6C68 BI3 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6C69 BI3 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6C6A BI3 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6C6B BI4 BI4PUD Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay 6C6C BI4 BI4DOD Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay 6C6D BI4 BI4SNS Binary Input 4 Sense 6C6E BI4 BI4SGS Binary Input 4 Settings Group Select 6C6F BI4 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C70 BI4 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C71 BI4 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C72 BI4 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6C73 BI4 UV2BLK UV2 Block

212

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Binary Input

6C74 BI4 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C75 BI4 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C76 BI4 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C77 BI4 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C78 BI4 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C79 BI4 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C7A BI4 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C7B BI4 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C7C BI4 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6C7D BI4 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6C7E BI4 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6C7F BI4 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6C80 BI4 RMTRST Remote Reset 6C81 BI4 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6C82 BI4 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6C83 BI4 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6C84 BI4 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6C85 BI4 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6C86 BI4 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6C87 BI4 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6C88 BI4 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6C89 BI4 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6C8A BI4 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block

6C8B BI4 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6C8C BI4 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6C8D BI4 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6C8E BI5 BI5PUD Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay 6C8F BI5 BI5DOD Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay

6C90 BI5 BI5SNS Binary Input 5 Sense 6C91 BI5 BI5SGS Binary Input 5 Settings Group Select 6C92 BI5 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6C93 BI5 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6C94 BI5 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6C95 BI5 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6C96 BI5 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6C97 BI5 UV3BLK UV3 Block 6C98 BI5 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6C99 BI5 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6C9A BI5 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6C9B BI5 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6C9C BI5 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm 6C9D BI5 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6C9E BI5 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6C9F BI5 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase

213

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Binary Input

6CA0 BI5 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6CA1 BI5 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6CA2 BI5 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6CA3 BI5 RMTRST Remote Reset 6CA4 BI5 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6CA5 BI5 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6CA6 BI5 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6CA7 BI5 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6CA8 BI5 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3. 6CA9 BI5 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6CAA BI5 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6CAB BI5 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6CAC BI5 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6CAD BI5 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6CAE BI5 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6CAF BI5 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6CB0 BI5 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block 6CB1 BI6 BI6PUD Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay 6CB2 BI6 BI6DOD Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay 6CB3 BI6 BI6SNS Binary Input 6 Sense 6CB4 BI6 BI6SGS Binary Input 6 Settings Group Select 6CB5 BI6 OV1BLK OV1 Block 6CB6 BI6 OV2BLK OV2 Block 6CB7 BI6 OV3BLK OV3 Block 6CB8 BI6 UV1BLK UV1 Block 6CB9 BI6 UV2BLK UV2 Block 6CBA BI6 UV3BLK UV3 Block

6CBB BI6 ZP1BLK ZPS1 Block 6CBC BI6 ZP2BLK ZPS2 Block 6CBD BI6 NP1BLK NPS1 Block 6CBE BI6 NP2BLK NPS2 Block 6CBF BI6 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm

6CC0 BI6 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open 6CC1 BI6 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close 6CC2 BI6 EXT3PH External Trip - 3 phase 6CC3 BI6 EXTAPH External Trip - A phase 6CC4 BI6 EXTBPH External Trip - B phase 6CC5 BI6 EXTCPH External Trip - C phase 6CC6 BI6 RMTRST Remote Reset 6CC7 BI6 SYNCLK Synchronize clock 6CC8 BI6 STORCD Store Disturbance Record 6CC9 BI6 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1. 6CCA BI6 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2. 6CCB BI6 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.

214

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Binary Input

6CCC BI6 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4. 6CCD BI6 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control 6CCE BI6 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control 6CCF BI6 CNTLCK Interlock Input 6CD0 BI6 FRQ1BLK FRQ1 Block 6CD1 BI6 FRQ2BLK FRQ2 Block 6CD2 BI6 FRQ3BLK FRQ3 Block 6CD3 BI6 FRQ4BLK FRQ4 Block

Binary Output

7428 BO1 Logic Logic Gate Type 7429 BO1 Reset Reset operation 7400 BO1 In #1 Functions 7401 BO1 In #2 Functions 7402 BO1 In #3 Functions 7403 BO1 In #4 Functions 7450 BO1 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 742A BO2 Logic Logic Gate Type 742B BO2 Reset Reset operation 7404 BO2 In #1 Functions 7405 BO2 In #2 Functions 7406 BO2 In #3 Functions 7407 BO2 In #4 Functions 7451 BO2 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 742C BO3 Logic Logic Gate Type 742D BO3 Reset Reset operation 7408 BO3 In #1 Functions 7409 BO3 In #2 Functions 740A BO3 In #3 Functions 740B BO3 In #4 Functions 7452 BO3 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 742E BO4 Logic Logic Gate Type 742F BO4 Reset Reset operation 740C BO4 In #1 Functions 740D BO4 In #2 Functions 740E BO4 In #3 Functions 740F BO4 In #4 Functions 7453 BO4 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 7430 BO5 Logic Logic Gate Type 7431 BO5 Reset Reset operation 7410 BO5 In #1 Functions 7411 BO5 In #2 Functions 7412 BO5 In #3 Functions 7413 BO5 In #4 Functions 7454 BO5 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 7432 BO6 Logic Logic Gate Type

215

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Binary Output

7433 BO6 Reset Reset operation 7414 BO6 In #1 Functions 7415 BO6 In #2 Functions 7416 BO6 In #3 Functions 7417 BO6 In #4 Functions 7455 BO6 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 7434 BO7 Logic Logic Gate Type 7435 BO7 Reset Reset operation 7418 BO7 In #1 Functions 7419 BO7 In #2 Functions 741A BO7 In #3 Functions 741B BO7 In #4 Functions 7456 BO7 TBO Delay/Pulse Width 7436 BO8 Logic Logic Gate Type 7437 BO8 Reset Reset operation 741C BO8 In #1 Functions 741D BO8 In #2 Functions 741E BO8 In #3 Functions 741F BO8 In #4 Functions 7457 BO8 TBO Delay/Pulse Width

Configurable LED

7020 LED1 Logic LED1 Logic Gate Type 7021 LED1 Reset LED1 Reset operation 7022 LED2 Logic LED2 Logic Gate Type 7023 LED2 Reset LED2 Reset operation 7024 LED3 Logic LED3 Logic Gate Type 7025 LED3 Reset LED3 Reset operation 7026 LED4 Logic LED4 Logic Gate Type 7027 LED4 Reset LED4 Reset operation 7028 LED5 Logic LED5 Logic Gate Type 7029 LED5 Reset LED5 Reset operation 702A LED6 Logic LED6 Logic Gate Type 702B LED7 Reset LED6 Reset operation 7000 LED1 In #1 LED Functions 7001 LED1 In #2 LED Functions 7002 LED1 In #3 LED Functions 7003 LED1 In #4 LED Functions 7004 LED2 In #1 LED Functions 7005 LED2 In #2 LED Functions 7006 LED2 In #3 LED Functions 7007 LED2 In #4 LED Functions 7008 LED3 In #1 LED Functions 7009 LED3 In #2 LED Functions 700A LED3 In #3 LED Functions 700B LED3 In #4 LED Functions

216

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Configurable LED

700C LED4 In #1 LED Functions 700D LED4 In #2 LED Functions 700E LED4 In #3 LED Functions 700F LED4 In #4 LED Functions 7010 LED5 In #1 LED Functions 7011 LED5 In #2 LED Functions 7012 LED5 In #3 LED Functions 7013 LED5 In #4 LED Functions 7014 LED6 In #1 LED Functions 7015 LED6 In #2 LED Functions 7016 LED6 In #3 LED Functions 7017 LED6 In #4 LED Functions 7060 LED1 Color LED Color 7061 LED2 Color LED Color 7062 LED3 Color LED Color 7063 LED4 Color LED Color 7064 LED5 Color LED Color 7065 LED6 Color LED Color 7066 CB CLOSED Color LED Color 7050 IND1 Reset IND1 Reset operation 7051 IND2 Reset IND1 Reset operation 7030 IND1 BIT1 Virtual LED 7031 IND1 BIT2 Virtual LED 7032 IND1 BIT3 Virtual LED 7033 IND1 BIT4 Virtual LED 7034 IND1 BIT5 Virtual LED 7035 IND1 BIT6 Virtual LED 7036 IND1 BIT7 Virtual LED 7037 IND1 BIT8 Virtual LED

Configurable LED

7038 IND2 BIT1 Virtual LED 7039 IND2 BIT2 Virtual LED 703A IND2 BIT3 Virtual LED 703B IND2 BIT4 Virtual LED 703C IND2 BIT5 Virtual LED 703D IND2 BIT6 Virtual LED 703E IND2 BIT7 Virtual LED 703F IND2 BIT8 Virtual LED

Active group/ Common

6800 Active gp. Active setting group 6803 AOLED ALARM LED light control for alarm output 6804 Control Control enable 6805 Interlock Interlock enable 6806 Control Kind Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable) 6807 Frequency Frequency

217

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Gr.1 Gr.2

Protection

4C00 5C00 PVT VT ratio 4C01 5C01 RVT Residual VT ratio 4017 5017 SVCNT AC input imbalance 4000 5000 OV OV1EN OV1 Enable 4001 5001 OV OV2EN OV2 Enable 4002 5002 OV OV3EN OV3 Enable 4003 5003 UV UV1EN UV1 Enable 4004 5004 UV UV2EN UV2 Enable 4005 5005 UV UV3EN UV3 Enable 4006 5006 UV VBLK UVBLOCK Enable 4007 5007 ZPS ZPS1EN ZPS1 Enable 4008 5008 ZPS ZPS2EN ZPS2 Enable 4009 5009 NPS NPS1EN NPS1 Enable 400A 500A NPS NPS2EN NPS2 Enable 400B 500B FRQ1 FT1 FRQ1 Enable / Type 400C 500C FRQ1 DFT1 DFRQ1 Enable / Type 400D 500D FRQ1 Logic1 FRQ1 Logic 400E 500E FRQ2 FT2 FRQ2 Enable / Type 400F 500F FRQ2 DFT2 DFRQ2 Enable / Type 4010 5010 FRQ2 Logic2 FRQ2 Logic 4011 5011 FRQ3 FT3 FRQ3 Enable / Type 4012 5012 FRQ3 DFT3 DFRQ3 Enable / Type 4013 5013 FRQ3 Logic3 FRQ3 Logic 4014 5014 FRQ4 FT4 FRQ4 Enable / Type 4015 5015 FRQ4 DFT4 DFRQ4 Enable / Type 4016 5016 FRQ4 Logic4 FRQ4 Logic 4800 5800 OV OV1 OV1 Threshold setting 4803 5803 OV TOV1 OV1 Time multiplier setting 4400 5400 OV TOV1 OV1 Definite time setting 4804 5804 OV TOV1R OV1 Definite time reset delay 4805 5805 OV OV1DPR OV1 DO/PU ratio 4801 5801 OV OV2 OV2 Threshold setting 4816 5816 OV TOV2 OV2 Time multiplier setting 4401 5401 OV TOV2 OV2 Definite time setting 4817 5817 OV TOV2R OV2 Definite time reset delay 4806 5806 OV OV2DPR OV2 DO/PU ratio 4802 5802 OV OV3 OV3 Threshold setting 4402 5402 OV TOV3 OV3 Definite time setting 4807 5807 OV OV3DPR OV3 DO/PU ratio 4818 5818 OV OV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 4819 5819 OV OV1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 481A 581A OV OV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV1 481B 581B OV OV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2

218

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Gr.1 Gr.2

481C 581C OV OV2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2 481D 581D OV OV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OV2 4808 5808 UV UV1 UV1 Threshold setting 480B 580B UV TUV1 UV1 Time multiplier setting 4403 5403 UV TUV1 UV1 Definite time setting 480C 580C UV TUV1R UV1 Definite time reset delay 4809 5809 UV UV2 UV2 Threshold setting 481E 581E UV TUV2 UV2 Time multiplier setting 4404 5404 UV TUV2 UV2 Definite time setting 481F 581F UV TUV2R UV2 Definite time reset delay 480A 580A UV UV3 UV2 Threshold setting 4405 5405 UV TUV3 UV3 Definite time setting 480D 580D UV VBLK UV Block Threshold setting 4820 5820 UV UV1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 4821 5821 UV UV1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 4822 5822 UV UV1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV1 4823 5823 UV UV2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 4824 5824 UV UV2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 4825 5825 UV UV2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of UV2 480E 580E ZPS ZPS1 ZPS1 Threshold setting 4810 5810 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Time multiplier setting 4406 5406 ZPS TZPS1 ZPS1 Definite time setting 4811 5811 ZPS TZPS1R ZPS1 Definite time reset delay 480F 580F ZPS ZPS2 ZPS2 Threshold setting 4826 5826 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Time multiplier setting 4407 5407 ZPS TZPS2 ZPS2 Definite time setting 4827 5827 ZPS TZPS2R ZPS2 Definite time reset delay 4828 5828 ZPS ZPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1 4829 5829 ZPS ZPS 1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1 482A 582A ZPS ZPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS1 482B 582B ZPS ZPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2 482C 582C ZPS ZPS 2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2 482D 582D ZPS ZPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of ZPS2 4812 5812 NPS NPS1 NPS1 Threshold setting 4814 5814 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Time multiplier setting 4408 5408 NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Definite time setting 4815 5815 NPS TNPS1R NPS1 Definite time reset delay 4813 5813 NPS NPS2 NPS2 Threshold setting 482E 582E NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Time multiplier setting 4409 5409 NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Definite time setting 482F 582F NPS TNPS2R NPS2 Definite time reset delay 4830 5830 NPS NPS 1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1 4831 5831 NPS NPS 1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1

Protection

219

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6



Gr.1 Gr.2

4832 5832 NPS NPS 1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS1 4833 5833 NPS NPS 2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2 4834 5834 NPS NPS 2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2 4835 5835 NPS NPS 2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of NPS2 4836 5836 FRQ F11 F11 Threshold setting 440A 540A FRQ TF11 F11 Time delay setting 4837 5837 FRQ F12 F12 Threshold setting 440B 540B FRQ TF12 F12 Time delay setting 4838 5838 FRQ DF1 DFRQ1 Threshold setting 4839 5839 FRQ F21 F21 Threshold setting 440C 540C FRQ TF21 F21 Time delay setting 483A 583A FRQ F22 F22 Threshold setting 440D 540D FRQ TF22 F22 Time delay setting 483B 583B FRQ DF2 DFRQ2 Threshold setting 483C 583C FRQ F31 F31 Threshold setting 440E 540E FRQ TF31 F31 Time delay setting 483D 583D FRQ F32 F32 Threshold setting 440F 540F FRQ TF32 F32 Time delay setting 483E 583E FRQ DF3 DFRQ3 Threshold setting 483F 583F FRQ F41 F41 Threshold setting 4410 5410 FRQ TF41 F41 Time delay setting 4840 5840 FRQ F42 F42 Threshold setting 4411 5411 FRQ TF42 F42 Time delay setting 4841 5841 FRQ DF4 DFRQ4 Threshold setting 4842 5842 FRQ FVBLK FRQ Block threshold setting

3. CB remote control

To control the CB at remote site with the Modbus communication, do the following.

･Operation item

- Remote control (CB on / off)

- Change of interlock position

- LED reset

・Operating procedure

To control the CB at remote site with Modbus communication is require the following three steps.

- Pass word authentication

- Enable flag setting for remote control

- Remote control

CAUTION

To control the CB at remote site, set the control hierarchy setting of relay to “Remote”.

Protection

220

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

A. Pass word authentication

To authenticate the password, enter the password for control function to the address of “3E82” . The password is the same as that of control function.

The password retention is 1 minute.

If no password is set, please enter “0000” as password.

The sending messages transmitted with ASCII code.

Ex. “0000” -> “303030303”

Message example (Relay address:01, Password:0000, need CRC frame)

to relay 01103E8200020430303030

from relay 01103E820002

B. Enable flag setting for remote control

To enable the remote control, turn on the address of “0200 : Remote control enable flag”.

When the operation completed or time-out occurs, the flag is reset.

Flag state can be checked in the command of “FC=01 Read Coils”.

Message example

to relay 02050200FF00

from relay 02050200FF00

C. Remote control

To control the CB at remote site, turn on or off the address of “0400: Remote control command”, ”0401: Remote interlock command” or “0402: Remote reset command”.

The “On” operation command is “FF00”. The “Off” operation command is “0000”.

The operation reply is checked by the “BO” or “LED” signals according to the relay settings.

Message example (Relay address:01、CB on, need CRC frame)

to relay 01050400FF00

from relay 01050400FF00

Message example (Relay address:01、CB off, need CRC frame)

to relay 010504000000

from relay 010504000000

221

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix M IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability

222

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 1. Physical Layer

1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485

Number of devices, 32 for one protection equipment

1.2 Transmission speed

User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s

2. Application Layer

COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (Application Service Data Unit)

One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)

3. IEC60870-5-103 Interface

3.1 Spontaneous events

The events created by the relay will be sent using the Function type (FUN) / Information numbers (INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. 8 wide-use events are provided.

3.2 General interrogation

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.

3.3 Cyclic measurements

The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 and 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured values is 2 seconds.

It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analog value. Either 1.2 or 2.4 can be selected by the “IECNFV” and “IECNFf” settings.

3.4 Commands

A list of the supported commands is contained in the table below. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.

3.5 Test mode

In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’. This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.

3.6 Blocking of monitor direction

If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and measurands are no longer transmitted.

For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.

223

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

4. List of Information

List of Information

INF Description Contents GI Type ID COT FUN

Standard Information numbers in monitor directionSystem Function

0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255

0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255

2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 215

3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 215

4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 215

5 Power On Relay power on. Not supported

Status Indications

16 Auto-recloser active If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set active, ifimpossible, inactive.

Not supported

17 Teleprotection active If protection using telecommunication is available, this item is setto active. If not, set to inactive.

Not supported

18 Protection active If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If not, set toinactive.

GI 1 1, 7, 9, 12,20

215

19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 7, 11, 12, 20 215

20 Monitor direction blocked Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control system.IECBLK: "Blocked" setting.

GI 1 9, 11 215

21 Test mode Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to controlsystem. IECTST: "ON" setting.

GI 1 9 215.

22 Local parameter Setting When a setting change has done at the local, the event is sentto control system.

Not supported

23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 7, 9, 11, 12,20

215

24 Characteristic2 Setting group 2 active GI 1 7, 9, 11, 12,20

215

25 Characteristic3 Setting group 3 active Not supported

26 Characteristic4 Setting group 4 active Not supported

27 Auxiliary input1 User specified signal 1 (Signal specified by IECB1: ON) (*1) GI 1 1, 7, 9 215




Supervision Indications

32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision Not supported

33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision GI 1 1, 7, 9 215

35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision GI 1 1, 7, 9 215

36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision GI 1 7, 9 215

37 I>>backup operation Not supported

38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported

39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported

46 Group warning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 215

47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 215

Earth Fault Indications

48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault (*2) Not supported

49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault (*2) Not supported

50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault (*2) Not supported

51 Earth Fault Fwd Earth fault forward (*2) Not supported

52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse (*2) Not supported

224

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6


Fault Indications

64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215

65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215

66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215

67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215

68 General trip BO status specified by IECGT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 215

69 Trip L1 BO status specified by IECAT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 215

70 Trip L2 BO status specified by IECBT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 215

71 Trip L3 BO status specified by IECCT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 215

72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip Not supported

73 Fault location X In ohms Fault location (prim. [ohm] / second. [ohm] / km selectable byIECFL)

Not supported

74 Fault forward/line Forward fault Not supported

75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported

76 Teleprotection Signaltransmitted

Carrier signal sending Not supported

77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported

78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported






84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 215

85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip Not supported

86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported



89 Trip measuring system E Not supported

90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip (OC1 trip) Not supported

91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip (OR logic of OC1 to OC3 trip) Not supported

92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 and SEF1 trip) Not supported

93 Trip IN>>Definite time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 to EF3 andSEF1 to SEF3 trip) Not supported

Autoreclose indications

128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output Not supported

129CB 'ON' by long-timeAutoreclose Not supported

130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block Not supported Note (*1): Not available if the setting is "0". (∗2): Not available when neither the EF nor SEF element is used.

225

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6


IECI1 User specified 1 Signal specified by IECE1: ON (*1) IECG1(yes/no)

2 1, 7 215


2 1, 7 215


2 1, 7 215


2 1, 7 215


2 1, 7 215


2 1, 7 215


2 1, 7 215


2 1, 7 215

Measurands(*3)144 Measurand I <meaurand I> Not supported

145 Measurand I,V Vb measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.2 2, 7 215

146 Measurand I,V,P,Q Vb measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.3 2, 7 215

147 Measurand IN,VEN Ve measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.4 2, 7 215

148 Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,P,Q,f

Va, Vb, Vc measurand <meaurand II> -- 3 2, 7 215

Generic Function240 Read Headings Not supported

241 Read attributes of all entries ofa group

Not supported

243 Read directory of entry Not supported

244 Real attribute of entry Not supported

245 End of GGI Not supported

249 Write entry with confirm Not supported

250 Write entry with execute Not supported

251 Write entry aborted Not supported Note (∗3): depends upon the relay model as follows:

Type ID=3.1 Type ID=3.2 Type ID=3.3 Type ID=3.4Model (INF=144) (INF=145) (INF=146) (INF=147)

IL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 3-phase P 3-phase Q IN VENModel 410 0 0 Vab 0 Vab 0 0 0 Ve

Type ID=9Model (INF=148)

IL1 IL2 IL3 VL1 VL2 VL3 3-phase P 3-phase Q fModel 410 0 0 0 Va Vb Vc 0 0 f

Above values are normalized by IECNF∗.

226

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

INF Description Contents COM Type ID COT FUN

Selection of standard information numbers in control directionSystem functions

0 Initiation of generalinterrogation

-- 7 9 215

0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 215

General commands

16 Auto-recloser on/off Not supported

17 Teleprotection on/off Not supported

18 Protection on/off (*4) ON/OFF 20 20 215

19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 215

23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 215

24 Activate characteristic 2 Setting Group 2 ON 20 20 215

25 Activate characteristic 3 Setting Group 3 Not supported

26 Activate characteristic 4 Setting Group 4 Not supported

Generic functions

240 Read headings of all definedgroups

Not supported

241 Read values or attributes of allentries of one group

Not supported

243 Read directory of a single entry Not supported

244 Read values or attributes of asingle entry

Not supported

245 General Interrogation of genericdata

Not supported

248 Write entry Not supported

249 Write entry with confirmation Not supported

250 Write entry with execution Not supported

251 Write entry abort Not supported Note (∗4): When the relay is receiving the "Protection off" command, the " IN SERVICE LED" is off.

Description Contents GRE130supported Comment

Basic application functions

Test mode Yes

Blocking of monitor direction Yes

Disturbance data No

Generic services No

Private data No

Miscellaneous

Measurand Max. MVAL = ratedvalue times

Current L1 Ia No

Current L2 Ib No

Current L3 Ic No

Voltage L1-E Va 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFV setting

Voltage L2-E Vb 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFV setting

Voltage L3-E Vc 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFV setting

Active power P P No

Reactive power Q Q No

Frequency f f 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFf setting

Voltage L1 - L2 Vab 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFV setting

227

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

[Legend]

GI: General Interrogation

Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)

1 : time-tagged message 2 : time-tagged message with relative time 3 : measurands I 4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time 5 : identification 6 : time synchronization 8 : general interrogation termination 9 : measurands II 10: generic data 11: generic identification 20: general command 23: list of recorded disturbances 26: ready for transmission for disturbance data 27: ready for transmission of a channel 28: ready for transmission of tags 29: transmission of tags 30: transmission of disturbance values 31: end of transmission

COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3) 1: spontaneous 2: cyclic 3: reset frame count bit (FCB) 4: reset communication unit (CU) 5: start / restart 6: power on 7: test mode 8: time synchronization 9: general interrogation 10: termination of general interrogation 11: local operation 12: remote operation 20: positive acknowledgement of command 21: negative acknowledgement of command 31: transmission of disturbance data 40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command 41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command 42: valid data response to generic read command 43: invalid data response to generic read command 44: generic write confirmation

228

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix P IEC61850: Interoperability

229

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

1. IEC61850 Documentation IEC61850 Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) for GRE130 The GRE130 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables. Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4

Logical Nodes GRE130 L: System Logical Nodes LPHD Yes Common Logical Node Yes LLN0 Yes P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions PDIF --- PDIR --- PDIS --- PDOP --- PDUP --- PFRC Yes PHAR --- PHIZ --- PIOC --- PMRI --- PMSS --- POPE --- PPAM --- PSCH --- PSDE --- PTEF --- PTOC --- PTOF Yes PTOV Yes PTRC Yes PTTR --- PTUC --- PTUV Yes PUPF --- PTUF Yes PVOC --- PVPH --- PZSU --- R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions RDRE --- RADR --- RBDR --- RDRS --- RBRF --- RDIR --- RFLO --- RPSB --- RREC --- RSYN --- C: Logical Nodes for Control

230

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Logical Nodes GRE130 CALH --- CCGR --- CILO Yes CPOW --- CSWI Yes G: Logical Nodes for Generic references GAPC --- GGIO Yes GGIO (for GOOSE) Yes GSAL --- I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving IARC --- IHMI --- ITCI --- ITMI --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control ANCR --- ARCO --- ATCC --- AVCO --- M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement MDIF --- MHAI --- MHAN --- MMTR --- MMXN --- MMXU Yes MSQI Yes MSTA --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring SARC --- SIMG --- SIML --- SPDC --- X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear XCBR Yes XSWI --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers TCTR --- TVTR --- Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers YEFN --- YLTC --- YPSH --- YPTR --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment ZAXN --- ZBAT --- ZCAB --- ZCAP --- ZCON ---

231

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Logical Nodes GRE130 ZGEN --- ZGIL --- ZLIN --- ZMOT --- ZREA --- ZRRC --- ZSAR --- ZTCF --- ZTCR ---

Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRE130 Status information SPS Yes DPS --- INS Yes ACT Yes ACD Yes SEC --- BCR --- Measured information MV Yes CMV Yes SAV --- WYE Yes DEL Yes SEQ Yes HMV --- HWYE --- HDEL --- Controllable status information SPC Yes DPC Yes INC Yes BSC --- ISC --- Controllable analogue information APC --- Status settings SPG --- ING Yes Analogue settings ASG Yes CURVE --- Description information DPL Yes LPL Yes CSD ---

232

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

LPHD class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N Common Logical Node class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD) Mod INC Mode M Y Beh INS Behaviour M Y Health INS Health M Y NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y Optional Logical Node Information Loc SPS Local operation O N EEHealth INS External equipment health O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N OpCnt INS Operation counter O N OpTmh INS Operation time O N Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2) Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2) Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Services (see IEC 61850-7-2) Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2) LLNO class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y OpTmh INS Operation time O N Controls Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y

233

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PFRC class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD Start M Y Op ACT Operate T M Y BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y Settings StrVal ASG Start Value df/dt O Y BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTOF class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD Start M Y Op ACT Operate T M Y BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y Settings StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTOV class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD Start M Y Op ACT Operate T O Y TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N Settings TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N StrVal ASG Start Value O Y TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N

234

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PTRC class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Tr ACT Trip C Y Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection

functions) C N

Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N Settings TrMod ING Trip Mode O N TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used. PTUV class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD Start M Y Op ACT Operate T M Y TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N Settings TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N StrVal ASG Start Value O Y TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTUF class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Status Information Str ACD Start M Y Op ACT Operate T M Y BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O Y Settings StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O Y BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Y OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N

235

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

CILO class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

Status Information EnaOpn SPS Enable Open M Y EnaCls SPS Enable Close M Y CSWI class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

Loc SPS Local operation O N OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Controls Pos DPC Switch, general M Y PosA DPC Switch L1 O N PosB DPC Switch L2 O N PosC DPC Switch L3 O N OpOpn ACT Operation “Open Switch” T O N OpCls ACT Operation “Close Switch” T O N GGIO class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N Loc SPS Local operation O N OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Measured values AnIn MV Analogue input O N Controls SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N Status Information IntIn INS Integer status input O N Alm SPS General single alarm O N Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind02 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind03 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind04 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind05 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind06 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind07 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind08 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind09 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind10 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y ::: Ind32 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y

236

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

GGIO (for GOOSE) class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N Loc SPS Local operation O N OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Measured values AnIn MV Analogue input O N Controls SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N Status Information IntIn INS Integer status input O N Alm SPS General single alarm O N Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind02 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind03 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind04 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind05 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind06 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind07 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind08 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind09 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind10 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind11 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind12 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind13 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind14 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind15 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y Ind16 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y MMXU class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N Measured values TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N Hz MV Frequency O Y PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O Y PhV WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y A WYE Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O N W WYE Phase active power (P) O N VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N PF WYE Phase power factor O N Z WYE Phase Impedance O N

237

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

MSQI class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N Measured values SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C N SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used. XCBR class Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE130 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node

Class M Y

EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y Controls Pos DPC Switch position M Y BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O N Metered Values SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N Status Information CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N

238

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

SPS class Attribute Name

Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRE130

DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute status stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration, description and extension d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3) INS class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute status stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y Substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration, description and extension d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3)

239

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ACT class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute status general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y configuration, description and extension operTm TimeStamp CF O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3) ACD class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute status general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |

backward | both M Y

phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |

backward GC_2 (1) Y

phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |

backward GC_2 (2) Y

phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |

backward GC_2 (3) Y

neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) Y dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward |

backward GC_2 (4) Y

q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y configuration, description and extension d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3)

240

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

MV class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute measured values instMag AnalogueValue MX O N mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high |

low-low |… O N

q Quality MX qchg M Y t TimeStamp MX M Y substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration, description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N smpRate INT32U CF O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21 (see IEC 61850-7-3)

241

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

CMV class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute measured values instCVal Vector MX O N cVal Vector MX dchg M Y range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high |

low-low |… O N

q Quality MX qchg M Y t TimeStamp MX M Y substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration, description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N angRef ENUMERATED CF V | A | other … O N smpRate INT32U CF O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21 (see IEC 61850-7-3)

WYE class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data phsA CMV GC_1 Y phsB CMV GC_1 Y phsC CMV GC_1 Y neut CMV GC_1 Y net CMV GC_1 N res CMV GC_1 N DataAttribute configuration, description and extension angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab

| Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother O N

d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21 (see IEC 61850-7-3)

242

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

DEL class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data phsAB CMV GC_1 Y phsBC CMV GC_1 Y phsCA CMV GC_1 Y DataAttribute configuration, description and extension angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab

| Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother O N

d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21 (see IEC 61850-7-3)

SEQ class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) Data c1 CMV M Y c2 CMV M Y c3 CMV M Y DataAttribute measured attributes seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y configuration, description and extension phsRef ENUMERATED CF A | B | C | … O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21 (see IEC 61850-7-3)

243

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

SPC class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute control and status ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O N ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_

M N

SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M

N

Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_

M and AC_CO_SBOW_E_M and AC_CO_TA_E_M

N

stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N Substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration, description and extension pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 31 (see IEC 61850-7-3) and Table E.2 (see IEC 61850-8-1)

244

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

DPC class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute control and status ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_

M Y


N

Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_


Y

stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on | bad-state

M Y

q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate-state | off | on |

bad-state PICS_SUBST N

subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration, description and extension pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N ctlModel CtlModels CF M Y sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O Y sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 31 (see IEC 61850-7-3) and Table E.3 (see IEC 61850-8-1)

245

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

INC class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute control and status ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_

M N


N

Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_


N

stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y Q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration, description and extension CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N minVal INT32 CF O N maxVal INT32 CF O N stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 31 (see IEC 61850-7-3) and Table E.4 (see IEC 61850-8-1)

246

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ING class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute setting setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N configuration, description and extension minVal INT32 CF O N maxVal INT32 CF O N stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 39 (see IEC 61850-7-3) ASG class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute setting setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N configuration, description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y minVal AnalogueValue CF O N maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 42 (see IEC 61850-7-3) DPL class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute configuration, description and extension vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 45 (see IEC 61850-7-3)

247

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

LPL class Attribute Name


DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2) DataAttribute configuration, description and extension vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0

only; for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"

AC_LN0_EX Y

lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 45 (see IEC 61850-7-3) Logical nodes for GRE130 Logical Nodes Relay Element PFRC PFRC1 FRQ (Setting) PFRC2 FRQ (Setting) PFRC3 FRQ (Setting) PFRC4 FRQ (Setting) PTOF PTOF1 FRQ (Setting) PTOF2 FRQ (Setting) PTOF3 FRQ (Setting) PTOF4 FRQ (Setting) PTOV PTOV11 OV1 PTOV12 OV2 PTOV13 OV3 PTOV21 ZPS1 PTOV22 ZPS2 PTOV31 NPS1 PTOV32 NPS2 PTRC PTRC1 General Trip PTUV PTUV11 UV1 PTUV12 UV2 PTUV13 UV3 PTUF PTUF1 FRQ (Setting) PTUF2 FRQ (Setting) PTUF3 FRQ (Setting) PTUF4 FRQ (Setting)

248

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement for GRE series IED ・NTRODUCTION This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the IEC

61850 interface in GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series. Together with the MICS, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC 61850-10. ・CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models conformance statement”.

249

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Client/

subscriber Server/ publisher

IED Remarks

Client-server roles B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY-

APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION) - c1 Y

B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)

c1 - -

SCSMs supported B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used N B24 SCSM: other - Generic substation event model (GSE) B31 Publisher side - O Y B32 Subscriber side O - Y Transmission of sampled value model (SVC) B41 Publisher side - O N B42 Subscriber side O - N If Server side (B11) supported M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y M3 Data c4 c4 Y M4 Data set c5 c5 Y M5 Substitution O O N M6 Setting group control O O Y Reporting M7 Buffered report control O O Y M7-1 sequence-number Y M7-2 report-time-stamp Y M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y M7-4 data-set-name Y M7-5 data-reference Y M7-6 buffer-overflow Y M7-7 entryID Y M7-8 BufTm Y M7-9 IntgPd Y M7-10 GI Y M8 Unbuffered report control O O Y M8-1 sequence-number Y M8-2 report-time-stamp Y M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y M8-4 data-set-name Y M8-5 data-reference Y M8-6 BufTm Y M8-7 IntgPd Y M8-8 GI Y Logging O O N M9 Log control O O N M9-1 IntgPd N M10 Log O O N M11 Control M M Y If GSE (B31/B32) is supported GOOSE O O Y M12-1 entryID M12-2 DataRefInc M13 GSSE O O N If SVC (B41/B42) is supported M14 Multicast SVC O O N M15 Unicast SVC O O N M16 Time M M Y M17 File Transfer O O N Server S1 GetServerDirectory M Y

250

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Application association S2 Associate M M Y S3 Abort M M Y S4 Release M M Y Logical device S5 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y Logical node S6 GetLogicalNodeDirectory M M Y S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y Data S8 GetDataValues M M Y S9 SetDataValues O O N S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y Data set S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y S13 SetDataSetValues O O N S14 CreateDataSet O O N S15 DeleteDataSet O O N S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y Substitution S17 SetDataValues M M N Setting group control S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y S19 SelectEditSG O O N S20 SetSGValues O O N S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N S22 GetSGValues O O N S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y Reporting Buffered report control block (BRCB) S24 Report c6 c6 Y S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y S24-3 data-update (dupd) N S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y Unbuffered report control block (URCB) S27 Report c6 c6 Y S27-1 data-change (dchg) Y S27-2 quality-change (qchg) Y S27-3 data-update (dupd) N S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y Logging Log control block S30 GetLCBValues M M N S31 SetLCBValues O M N Log S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N Generic substation event model (GSE) GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y S36 GetGoReference O c9 N S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N S41 GetGsReference O c9 N S42 GetGSSEDataOffset O c9 N S43 GetGsCBValues O O N S44 SetGsCBValues O O N

251

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Transmission of sampled value model (SVC) Multicast SVC S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N Unicast SVC S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N Control S51 Select M O Y S52 SelectWithValue M O Y S53 Cancel O O Y S54 Operate M M Y S55 CommandTermination M O N S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N File Transfer S57 GetFile O M N S58 SetFile O O N S59 DeleteFile O O N S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O N Time T1 Time resolution of internal clock 100ms T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 100ms T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 100ms M – Mandatory O – Optional c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared. c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared. c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared. c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has

been declared. c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared. c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB) c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter). c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage) c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available. c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).

252

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PICS for A-Profile support A-Profile

shortcut Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks

F/S F/S A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y A2 GOOSE/GSE

management A-Profile c2 c2 Y

A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement. c2 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 6 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement. c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 9 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement. c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC 61850-8-1.

PICS for T-Profile support A-Profile

shortcut Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks

F/S F/S T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'. c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'. c3 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A2 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'. c4 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A3 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.

253

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Protcol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing (PIXIT) for IEC61850 interface in GRE series IED ・Introduction This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850 interface in GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series version upper than A (MVM850-01-A). Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC 61850-10. ・Contents of this document Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC 61850-10.

PIXIT for Association model ID Description Value / Clarification As1 Maximum number of clients that can

set-up an association simultaneously 6

As2 TCP_KEEPALIVE value 7200 seconds at the default setting. Setting range is from 1s to 43200s.

As3 Lost connection detection time After the KEEPALIVE is no response, retrying 9 times every “X” seconds until declaring that the association has been lost.

“X” is one tenth of TCP_KEEPALIVE value. Ex. The lost connection detection time is 18s (9 times x 2 s), when TCP_KEEPALIVE

value is 20 s. As4 Is authentication supported N As5 What association parameters are

necessary for successful association Transport selector N Session selector N Presentation selector N AP Title N AE Qualifier N

As6 If association parameters are necessary for association, describe the correct values e.g.

N.A.

As7 What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU size

Max MMS PDU size 8172 Min MMS PDU size Not limited. It

depends on a request. As8 What is the maximum startup time

after a power supply interrupt 180 seconds Check the start-up signal (No.227)

254

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PIXIT for Server model ID Description Value / Clarification Sr1 Which analogue value (MX) quality bits

are supported (can be set by server) Validity: Y Good, Y Invalid, N Reserved, Y Questionable N Overflow Y OutofRange N BadReference N Oscillatory Y Failure N OldData N Inconsistent N Inaccurate (Only Hz) Source: N Process N Substituted Y Test N OperatorBlocked

Sr2 Which status value (ST) quality bits are supported (can be set by server)

Validity: Y Good, Y Invalid, N Reserved, Y Questionable N BadReference N Oscillatory Y Failure N OldData N Inconsistent N Inaccurate Source: N Process N Substituted Y Test N OperatorBlocked

Sr3 What is the maximum number of data values in one GetDataValues request

Not restricted; depend on the max. MAX PDU size given in previous page.

Sr4 What is the maximum number of data values in one SetDataValues request

N.A.

Sr5 Which Mode / Behavior values are supported

On Y Blocked N Test Y Test/Blocked N Off N

255

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PIXIT for Data set model ID Description Value / Clarification Ds1 What is the maximum number of data

elements in one data set (compare ICD setting)

Not limited by an internal configuration parameter.

This IED does not have CreateDataSet

service. But any DataSet can be defined by using engineering tool. The maximum number depends on the memory size of IED.

Ds2 How many persistent data sets can be created by one or more clients

(this number includes predefined datasets)

Not limited by an internal configuration parameter.

The maximum number depends on the

memory size of IED. Ds3 How many non-persistent data sets

can be created by one or more clients N.A.

PIXIT for Substitution model ID Description Value / Clarification Sb1 Are substituted values stored in

volatile memory? N.A.

PIXIT for Setting group control model ID Description Value / Clarification Sg1 What is the number of supported

setting groups for each logical device (compare NumSG in the SGCB)

2

Sg2 What is the effect of when and how the non-volatile storage is updated

(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4)

Just SelectActiveSG service will be supported according to PICS.

After changing setting group number with LCD panel, you can see new setting group with GetSGCBValue service.

Sg3 Can multiple clients edit the same setting group

N.A.

Sg4 What happens if the association is lost while editing a setting group

N.A.

Sg5 Is EditSG value 0 allowed? N.A.

256

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PIXIT for Reporting model ID Description Value / Clarification Rp1 The supported trigger conditions are

(compare PICS) integrity Y data change Y quality change Y data update N general interrogation Y

Rp2 The supported optional fields are sequence-number Y report-time-stamp Y reason-for-inclusion Y data-set-name Y data-reference Y buffer-overflow Y entryID Y conf-rev Y segmentation Y

Rp3 Can the server send segmented reports

Y

Rp4 Mechanism on second internal data change notification of the same analogue data value within buffer period (Compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.2.9)

Send report immediately

Rp5 Multi client URCB approach (compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.1)

Each URCB is visible to all clients

Rp6 What is the format of EntryID It is made up of the circular buffer counter at the time the event was entered.

Rp7 What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how many reports can be buffered

For example, LLN0$ST$Health can be stored 40 events.

Rp8 Pre-configured RCB attributes that cannot be changed online when RptEna = FALSE

(see also the ICD report settings)

N.A.

Rp9 May the reported data set contain: - structured data objects? - data attributes?

Y Y

Rp10 What is the scan cycle for binary events?

Is this fixed, configurable

GRE110: More than 1500 milliseconds Fixed

Rp11 Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a specific client in the SCL

N

257

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PIXIT for Logging model ID Description Value / Clarification Lg1 What is the default value of LogEna

(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.2.1, the default value should be FALSE)

N.A.

Lg2 What is the format of EntryID (Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.1)

N.A.

Lg3 If there are multiple Log Control Blocks that specify the Journaling of the same MMS NamedVariable and TrgOps and the Event Condition

(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.2)

N.A.

Lg4 Pre-configured LCB attributes that cannot be changed online

N.A.

PIXIT for Generic substation events model ID Description Value / Clarification Go1 What elements of a subscribed

GOOSE header are checked to decide the message is valid and the allData values are accepted? If yes, describe the conditions.

Note: the VLAN tag may be removed by a ethernet switch and should not be checked

N source MAC address Y destination MAC address = as configured Y Ethertype = 0x88B8 Y APPID = as configured and 0 Y gocbRef = as configured N timeAllowedtoLive N datSet Y goID = as configured N t N stNum Y sqNum Y test N confRev Y ndsCom N numDatSetEntries

Go2 Can the test flag in the published GOOSE be turned on / off

N

Go3 What is the behavior when the GOOSE publish configuration is incorrect

If the configuration is incorrect, the GOOSE isn’t published.

Go4 When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as lost?

(TAL = time allowed to live value from the last received GOOSE message)

Message does not arrive prior to TAL.

Go5 What is the behavior when one or more subscribed GOOSE messages isn’t received or syntactically incorrect (missing GOOSE)

[stNum is out-of-order, or missed] No fail will be detected. [sqNum is out-of-order, or missed] GOOSE subscribe quality information will

become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0). After receiving message with correct sqNum order, the quality information is set to GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).

Go6 What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE message is

Refer to Go5.

258

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ID Description Value / Clarification out-of-order

Go7 What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE message is duplicated

GOOSE subscribe quality information will become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0).

Go8 Does the device subscribe to GOOSE messages with/without the VLAN tag?

Y, with the VLAN tag Y, without the VLAN tag

Go9 May the GOOSE data set contain: - structured data objects (FCD)? - timestamp data attributes? Note: data attributes (FCDA) is

mandatory

Subscribed Published Y N N N

Go10 Published FCD supported common data classes / data types are

-

Go11 Subscribed FCD supported common data classes / data types are

-

Go12 What is the slow retransmission time?

Is it fixed or configurable?

60 seconds with TAL = 120 seconds Fixed.

Go13 What is the minimum supported retransmission time?

What is the maximum supported retransmission time?


<minTime> 300 milliseconds <maxTime> - Fixed

Go14 Can the Goose publish be turned on / off by using SetGoCBValues(GoEna)

Y

Go15 What is the fast retransmission scheme?


300 milliseconds with TAL = 600 milliseconds Fixed.

Go16 What is the behavior when one subscribed GOOSE message exceeds the previous time Allowed to Live (TAL)

When expected time (TAL) spends without GOOSE message, GOOSE subscribe quality information will become QUESTIONABLE (=1100 0000 0000 0).

After that, when IED receive time exceeded

GOOSE with SqNum=0, GOOSE subscribe quality information will become GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).

When IED receive time exceeded GOOSE with

SqNum!=0, GOOSE subscribe quality information will become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0)

When GOOSE with TAL=0 is received, GOOSE

subscribe quality information will become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0)

Payload data consistency is not used to

determine if TAL is exceeded. Go17 What is the behavior when a

subscribed GOOSE message is “test” GOOSE subscribe quality information will

become QUESTIONABLE | TEST (=1100 0000

259

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ID Description Value / Clarification 0001 0).

Payload data is not received. Go18 What is the behavior when a

subscribed GOOSE message is “ndsCom”

GOOSE subscribe quality information will become QUESTIONABLE | INACCURATE (=1100 0000 0100 0).

Payload data is not received. Go19 Acceptable data type Boolean

BitSring Integer Unsigned Integer But each data size shall be less than 32 bits. Other types (TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will

be ignored by IED. When GOOSE subscribe quality information is

GOOD, the IED receives the payload data. Go20 Dataset structure of a subscribed

GOOSE This is not checked. Two GOOSEs, which have

same header (e.g.GoID) and different dataset structure, are treated as the same GOOSEs.

And if received GOOSEs have same header, the

fixed position of the GOOSE dataset is read. E.g. the 1st element of the dataset is set to read, it keeps reading the 1st element even if the dataset structure is different.

Note: Subscribed payload data structure is checked to

determine if IED accepts/discards the data; however the TAL timeout is reset even when such data is discarded.

Go21 What is the behavior when the device starts up?

The device starts sending GOOSE from stNum=1 and sqNum=1.

Go22 Is it supported to set the “ndsCom” as TRUE?

N

TAL = Time Allowed to Live

260

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PIXIT for Control model ID Description Value / Clarification Ct1 What control models are supported

(compare PICS) Y status-only Y direct-with-normal-security Y sbo-with-normal-security N direct-with-enhanced-security N sbo-with-enhanced-security

Ct2 Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or online changeable?

Configurable (need to restart after configuration)

Ct3 Is Time activated operate supported N Ct4 Is “operate-many” supported N Ct5 Will the DUT activate the control

output when the test attribute is set in the SelectWithValue and/or Operate request (when N test procedure Ctl2 is applicable)

N

FALSE TRUE

Normal Accepted Rejected Test Rejected Accepted

Accepted: The control request is accepted by IED. Rejected: The control request is rejected by IED with

AddCause “Blocked-by-Mode”. Ct6 What are the conditions for the time

(T) attribute in the SelectWithValue and/or Operate request?

N.A.

Ct7 Is pulse configuration supported N Ct8 What is the behavior of the DUT when

the check conditions are set? Is this behavior fixed, configurable,

online changeable?

Only interlock bit is checked. This behavior is fixed. Note: When interlock is an enable, the control

request is rejected by IED with AddCause “Blocked-by-Interlocking”.

Ct9 What additional cause diagnosis are supported?

Y Not-supported N Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy Y Select-failed N Invalid-position

N Position-reached N Parameter-change-in-execution N Step-limit Y Blocked-by-Mode N Blocked-by-process Y Blocked-by-interlocking N Blocked-by-synchrocheck N Command-already-in-execution N Blocked-by-health N 1-of-n-control N Abortion-by-cancel N Time-limit-over N Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)

Y Object-non-selected

Ct10 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with SelectWithValue request?

Set orCat with unsupported value.

IED Mode

Test flag

261

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

ID Description Value / Clarification Ct11 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond

with Select request? N.A.

Ct12 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Operate request?

DOns, SBOns: Set orCat with unsupported value. DOes, SBOes: N.A.

Ct13 Which origin categories are supported?

N

Ct14 What happens if the orCat is not supported?

DOns, SBOns: “test-not-ok” IED respond DOes, SBOes: N.A.

Ct15 Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue/Operate with the same ctlVal as the current status value?

DOns, SBOns: N The control request is rejected by IED with

AddCause “Blocked-by-Interlocking”. DOes, SBOes: N.A.

Ct16 Does the IED accept a select/operate on the same control object from 2 different clients at the same time?

DOns,: Y SBOns: N DOes, SBOes: N.A.

Ct17 Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue from the same client when the control object is already selected (tissue 334)

SBOns: N SBOes: N.A.

Ct18 Is for SBOes the internal validation performed during the SelectWithValue and/or Operate step?

N.A.

Ct19 Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off or Blocked

Y

Ct20 Does the IED support local / remote operation?

Y

Ct21 Does the IED send an InformationReport with LastApplError as part of the Operate response- for control with normal security?

DOns: N SBOns: Y

262

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

PIXIT for TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION model ID Description Value / Clarification Tm1 What quality bits are supported

(may be set by the IED) N LeapSecondsKnown N ClockFailure Y ClockNotSynchronized

Tm2 Describe the behavior when the time synchronization signal/messages are lost

The quality attribute “ClockNotSynchronized” will be set to TRUE.

Tm3 When is the time quality bit "Clock failure" set?

N.A.

Tm4 When is the time quality bit "Clock not synchronised” set?

It depends on the condition of synchronization. Typically 120 seconds

Tm5 Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to the configured scan cycle?

N

Tm6 Does the device support time zone and daylight saving?

Y Support time zone only.

Tm7 Which attibutes of the SNTP response packet are validated?

Y Leap indicator not equal to 3? N Mode is equal to SERVER N OriginateTimestamp is equal to

value sent by the SNTP client as Transmit Timestamp

Y RX/TX timestamp fields are checked for reasonableness

Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4 N other (describe)

PIXIT for FILE TRANSFER model ID Description Value / Clarification Ft1 What is structure of files and

directories? Where are the COMTRADE files

stored? Are comtrade files zipped and what

files are included in each zip file?

N.A.

Ft2 Directory names are separated from the file name by

N.A.

Ft3 The maximum file name size including path (recommended 64 chars)

N.A.

Ft4 Are directory/file name case sensitive? N.A. Ft5 Maximum file size N.A. Ft6 Is the requested file path included in

the file name of the MMS fileDirectory respond?

N.A.

Ft7 Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory request?

N.A.

Ft8 Is it allowed that 2 client get a file at the same time?

N.A.

263

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

IEC61850 Tissues conformance statement (TICS) of the IEC61850 communication interface GRE series IED

・Introduction According to the UCA IUG QAP the tissue conformance statement is required to perform a

conformance test and is referenced on the certificate. This document is applicable for GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series

version upper than A (MVM850-01-A).

・Mandatory Intop Tissues During the October 2006 meeting IEC TC57 working group 10 decided that:

• green Tissues with the category “IntOp” are mandatory for IEC 61850 edition 1 • Tissues with the category “Ed.2” Tissues should not be implemented.

Below table gives an overview of the implemented IntOp Tissues.

264

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

NOTE: Tissue 49, 190, 191, 275 and 278 are part of the optional tissue #453, all other technical tissues in the table are

mandatory if applicable. Optional IntOp Tissues

Part Tissue Nr

Description Implemented

Y/n.a.

8-1 116 GetNameList with empty response? Y 165 Improper Error Response for GetDataSetValues Y 183 GetNameList error handling Y

7-4 None 7-3 28 Definition of APC n.a.

54 Point def xVal, not cVal n.a. 55 Ineut = Ires ? n.a. 60 Services missing in tables Y 63 mag in CDC CMV Y 65 Deadband calculation of a Vector and trigger option Y 219 operTm in ACT n.a. 270 WYE and DEL rms values Y

7-2

30 control parameter T n.a 31 Typo n.a. 32 Typo in syntax n.a. 35 Typo Syntax Control time n.a. 36 Syntax parameter DSet-Ref missing n.a. 37 Syntax GOOSE "T" type n.a. 39 Add DstAddr to GoCB Y 40 GOOSE Message “AppID” to “GoID” Y 41 GsCB “AppID” to “GsID” n.a. 42 SV timestamp: “EntryTime” to “TimeStamp" n.a. 43 Control "T" semantic n.a. 44 AddCause - Object not sel n.a. 45 Missing AddCauses (neg range) Y 46 Synchro check cancel n.a. 47 "." in LD Name? Y 49 BRCB TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y 50 LNName start with number? Y 51 ARRAY [0..num] missing n.a. 52 Ambiguity GOOSE SqNum Y 53 Add DstAddr to GsCB, SV n.a. 151 Name constraint for control blocks etc. Y 166 DataRef attribute in Log n.a. 185 Logging - Integrity periode n.a. 189 SV Format n.a. 190 BRCB: EntryId and TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y 191 BRCB: Integrity and buffering reports (part of #453) Y 234 New type CtxInt (Enums are mapped to 8 bit integer) n.a. 275 Confusing statement on GI usage (part of #453) Y 278 EntryId not valid for a server (part of #453) Y

Part 6 1 Syntax Y 5 tExtensionAttributeNameEnum is restricted Y 8 SIUnit enumeration for W n.a. 10 Base type for bitstring usage Y 17 DAI/SDI elements syntax Y 169 Ordering of enum differs from 7-3 Y

265

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

After the approval of the server conformance test procedures version 2.2 the following IntOp

tissues were added or changed. It is optional to implement these tissues. Part Tissue Nr Description Implemented

Y/N/n.a. 8-1 246 Control negative response (SBOns) with LastApplError Y 8-1 545 Skip file directories with no files n.a 7-2 333 Enabling of an incomplete GoCB n.a. 7-2 453 Combination of all reporting and logging tissues N 6 245 Attribute RptId in SCL N 6 529 Replace sev - Unknown by unknown n.a. Other Implemented Tissues Part Tissue Nr Description Implemented

Y/N/n.a. 8-1 109 GOOSE, GSE, SV Addresses Y

118 File directory n.a. 121 GOOSE subscriber behavior Y 344 TimeOfEntry misspelled Y

7-4 76 CBOpCap and SwOpCap N 7-2 38 Syntax "AppID" or "GoID" Y 6 3 Missing ENUMs Y

6 ReportControl/OptFields N 7 Duplication of attributes N 11 Schema for IP Addr? N 15 bufOvfl in Schema? Y

266

http://www.tissues.iec61850.com/tissue.mspx?issueid=118










6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

2. CB remote control

To control the CB at remote site with the IEC 61850 communication, do the following.

･Operation item

- Remote control by the Select Before Operate or Direct Operate (CB Open / CB Close)

- Change of interlock position (BlkOpn or BlkCls)

- Trip LED reset

・Operating procedure

To control the CB at remote site with ICE 61850 communication is require the following three steps.

- get Logical nodes by using IEC 61850 data setting tools (such as TAMARACK tool).

- change the control logical node (XCBR, CILO or CSWI).

When CB is remote controlled from PC, showing below the control reaction depending on the CB Status.

CB Status Response

BI-a (CB_OPC_BI)

BI-b (CB_CLC_BI)

CB LED lighting CB Open Operation CB Close Operation

0 0 CLOSE ・Unlock: operate ・Lock※: not operate

・Unlock: not operate ・Lock: not operate

1 0 CLOSE ・Unlock: operate ・Lock: not operate


1 1 CLOSE ・Unlock: not operate ・Lock: not operate


0 1 OPEN ・Unlock: not operate ・Lock: not operate

・Unlock: operate ・Lock: not operate

※Lock condition is as follows.

• Setting the Inter lock in the Control screen of front panel LCD (see chapter 4.2.6.11) and remote setting the CB open lock and CB close lock from PC.

• Occurring Relay Trip. • When Local/Remote status is “Local” (see chapter 4.2.7.1). • When Control status is “Disable” (see chapter 4.2.6.11).

267

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Appendix O

Ordering

268

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Ordering

Under/Overvoltage Relay

A GRE130 0

Type: Voltage Relay GRE130 Model: - Model 410: Four pole 2 x BIs, 4 x Bos, 1 x Relay fail 6 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail 6 x BIs, 8 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail

410 411 412

Rating: VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc VT: 110V, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc

1 2 A

Standard and language: IEC (English) ANSI (English) Chinese

0 1 2

Communication: RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) Following options can be equipped

with Model 402 and 422 only RS485 2ports (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) RS485 2ports (Modbus/DNP3.0) 100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0) +RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) 100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-TX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0) +RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) 100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/ DNP3.0) +RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) 100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ IEC61850) +RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 100BASE-FX 2ports (Modbus/ DNP3.0) +RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0)

10 11

20 21 A0

A1

B0

B1

C0

C1

D0

D1

269

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 6

Version-up Records

Version No.

Date Revised Section Contents

0.0 Nov. 24, 2010 -- First issue 1.0 Apr. 19, 2012 4.2.6

Appendix G Appendix J Appendix L

Modified the description. Modified the description. Modified the description. Modified the description.

1.1 Jan. 28, 2013 Appendix F Appendix J Appendix M

Modified the diagrams. Modified the description. Modified the Ordering Cords.

1.2 Feb. 26, 2013 Appendix J Modified the description. 2.0 May.29, 2014

1 3.2.2 3.2.4 3.3.3 4.1 4.2 4.5 4.6 5 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix J Appendix L Appendix M Appendix N Appendix O

Add model 412A and IEC60850-5-103 and IEC61850 communication Add the 412A model and communication. Modified the description. Add the description. Modified the description Add the description of GRE130-412A. Add the communication settings. Add the IEC60870-5-103. Add the IEC61850 Add the GRE130-412A descriptions. Modified the Signal List Modified the description Add the GRE130-412A. Add the GRE130-412A Add the GRE130-412A Modified the description Modified the description Modified the description Add the description. Add the description Modified the section No.

270

GRE130_MANUAL_2014

Documents

Transcript of GRE130_MANUAL_2014